JP6364737B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines, are set so that a privilege is given to a player when a specific condition is established based on the launch of a game ball. Specifically, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state such as a winning gaming state, etc., when a gaming ball has entered the ball-entry unit provided in the gaming area is performed. There is something to be said. When the lottery is won (that is, when the above specific condition is satisfied), for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, and the number of balls entering the variable pitching device is determined. A game ball is paid out (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  This type of gaming machine has a so-called hold function by storing information related to the lottery lottery and making the number of storable information more than one when a ball enters the ball-entry unit. In some cases, the game progress is facilitated.

JP 2001-062098 A

  In recent years, what notifies the number of memorize | stored information using a display screen or a light-emitting body is proposed, and various devices are given to the alerting | reporting aspect in order to implement | achieve the improvement of the attention degree to a game. However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the degree of attention to games using such information storage function and notification mode.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention described in claim 1
A ball entrance part that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the entrance portion;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the allocation information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A symbol display means for variably displaying symbols;
Prior to the application determination being made by the application determination means or based on the application determination being made by the application determination means, variable display of the symbol on the symbol display means is started, and the application determination means The display corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped as one game time, and the symbol is displayed for each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game times control means for controlling the symbol display means;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information;
Production display means having a display part provided separately from the symbol display means, and effect display on the display part;
Display control means for controlling the effect display means so that a specific effect display that can be continued over a plurality of game times is executed as the effect display in the display unit;
A stopping part configured to stop a plurality of gaming balls that have entered the entering part so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine and to discharge the stopping gaming balls,
A stopping control means capable of stopping a number of game balls corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the stopping portion;
The stop control means, when the specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times, prevents the outflow of game balls from the stop part, thereby the number of special information that is the target of the specific effect display. And a stopping means for stopping the same number of game balls in the stop portion, and a game ball stopped in the stop portion at a timing after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect display and before the specific effect display ends. Discharging means for discharging
The display control means controls the effect display means so that after the game ball is discharged from the stop portion by the discharge means, the specific effect display is ended and the result of the determination of grant is notified on the display portion. And
The stopping unit can stop a larger number of game balls than the upper limit number of special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage unit.
The display control means includes
Effect display start means for starting the specific effect display based on the fact that at least one special information is stored in the acquired information storage means;
Confirmation means for confirming the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means during execution of the specific effect display;
Effect display mode determining means for determining a target game time for the specific effect display based on the number of special information confirmed by the confirmation means;
Have
The said effect display means is controlled so that the said specific effect display is performed over the number of game times larger than the said upper limit number as the said effect display in the said display part, It is characterized by the above-mentioned .

  The degree of attention to the game can be increased well.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a fragmentary sectional view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol displayed on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of a special winning opening, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the support pattern by an electrically-driven accessory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for an operation | movement pitching part. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows opening command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process of holding information. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. (A) The flowchart which shows the display change process in the special game state performed by MPU of a display control apparatus, (b) It is the schematic which shows the change aspect of the display area in a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation mode determination process performed in MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process in the special game state performed with MPU of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the special display effect performed on a display screen. (A) Flowchart showing setting process in special game state executed by MPU of main controller, schematic diagram showing variable display time determination table, (c) schematic diagram showing relationship between game times and special display effects It is. It is the block diagram which showed the flow of the game roughly. It is a flowchart which shows the special time setting preparation process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process corresponding to a special game state. It is a flowchart which shows a special fluctuation mode determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a special effect aspect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process in a special game state. It is a timing chart which illustrated the relationship between the acquisition timing of the pending | holding information in the condition which is in a special game state, and the timing which finalizes the game time (holding information) used as the object of special fluctuation display. It is the schematic which shows the display mode of the display screen in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the structure of the symbol sequence displayed on a display screen. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of special fluctuation display corresponding to a hit result. It is a timing chart which shows the mode of the special fluctuation display corresponding to a deviation result. It is the schematic which shows the ball path unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for holding | maintenance special alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows a passage switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball | bowl feeding process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop control process. It is a flowchart which shows a special effect aspect determination process. The relationship between the acquisition timing of the hold information in the situation of the special game state, the timing for determining the game times (hold information) to be displayed for the special variation display, and the storage / discharge of the game ball in the ball passage unit It is the illustrated timing chart. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a ball path unit.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view ( (See FIG. 3).

<Front door frame 14>
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other across a predetermined gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A sphere lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper dish passage that leads to the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish path that leads to the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish passage are guided to the upper dish 33, and the game balls that have entered the front door side lower dish path are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of bar brackets 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

<Inner frame 13>
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by a resin base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

  Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 49 being locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 has an inner frame collar member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the key is turned counterclockwise.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed at the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 60, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board 60 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

<Game board 60>
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). In each opening, a general winning opening 61, operating ball entering portions 62 and 63, a variable ball entering device 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67 and the like are arranged. When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 61, the actuating ball units 62 and 63, and the variable ball device 65, this is detected by a detection sensor, and a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of award balls based on the detection result. Is given to the player.

  An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening part, and after passing through the opening part, the game ball passes through the opening part as well as being discharged from the game area PE. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 68, the general winning port 61, the operation ball entering parts 62 and 63, the variable ball entering device 65, and the through gate 66 are entered. The ball is also expressed as a prize.

  Further, the game board 60 is provided with a large number of nails 69 in order to disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided. By various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated and adjusted so that a winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operation entrance parts 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The operation entrance parts 62 and 63 are disposed below and to the right of the variable display unit 67. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the lower operation entrance portion is referred to as “lower operation entrance portion 62”, and the right operation entrance portion is referred to as “right operation entrance portion 63”.

  In particular, the right-hand actuated entrance part (lottery opportunity entrance part) 63 is provided with an open / close type entrance assist device (entrance assist means) or an electric accessory 71 as an open / close member (open / close means). The electric accessory 71 includes a movable piece 71a and a solenoid-type drive portion 71b that drives the movable piece 71a. By operating the movable piece 71a, an inlet portion (right side) An open state (support state or auxiliary state) in which the entry into the operating port 63a) is possible or easy, and a closed state (non-support state or non-assist state) in which the same entry is impossible or more difficult than the open state. And can be switched.

  In the game area PE, the through gate 66 is arranged at a position (right route) that is to the side of the variable display unit 67 and upstream (specifically, directly above) the right action ball entry portion 63. Yes. When the winning combination is a lottery triggered by the passing of the through ball 66 of the game ball, the electric accessory 71 is in an open state for a preset time.

  As a support mode for the electrically-powered object 71 of the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63, the right-hand actuating port 63a has a unit time when compared with the game area PE in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner. The low-frequency support mode (the low-frequency support state or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (the high-frequency support state or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high. Is set.

  A ball passage through which a game ball passes is formed in the through gate 66, and the game ball that has passed through this passage route reaches the right working ball entry portion 63 through a guide passage 64 formed by arranging nails 69. It has a configuration. In this way, by devising to increase the probability of entering the right-hand action entry unit 63, the game is advanced while suppressing investment (suppressing the decrease in holding balls) during the high-frequency support mode described later. Can do.

  A ball passage through which a game ball passes is also formed in the right working ball entering portion 63, and a game ball that has not won the right working ball entering portion 63 passes through the right working ball entering portion 63 and passes through the right working ball. It flows down toward the variable pitching device 65 arranged below the portion 63.

  The variable pitching device (special pitching device or special pitching means) 65 is formed with a large winning opening 65a leading to the back side of the game board 60, and an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the large winning hole 65a. Is provided. The opening / closing mechanism includes an opening / closing door 65b as an opening / closing member for the special winning opening 65a. The open / close door 65b is switched between an open state (assisting state or receiving state) in which a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assist state or non-accepting state) in which the entering ball is impossible or difficult. It is possible. Further, the opening / closing door 65b is connected to a variable ball driving unit 65c (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the opening / closing door 65b is maintained in a closed state under normal conditions. In the lottery, when the winning / opening execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won, the open state is switched.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable pitching device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (0.06 sec or 30 sec in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) is awarded. One round is set so that the opening and closing of the door 65b is repeated up to a plurality of rounds (four or eight in the present embodiment) as an upper limit.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the arrangement of each of the actuated entrance parts 62 and 63 and the variable entrance apparatus 65.

  When a game ball is fired toward the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67, the game ball that has passed through the side of the variable display unit 67 is below the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. Guided to the area. At this time, the game ball that has passed through the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 flows down to the variable entrance device 65, and if it does not enter the big prize opening 65 a of the variable entrance device 65, the game ball passes through the out entrance 68. It is discharged out of the game area PE. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entering portion 62 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the right route cannot be reached.

  Note that the variable pitching device 65 guides the game ball toward a region below the variable display unit 67 in the game region PE (specifically, a region downstream of the lower actuation ball entering portion 62). The guiding portion is formed, and the game ball that has passed through the variable pitching device 65 flows down toward the out port 68. In other words, the lower operation ball entry portion 62 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched toward the region on the right side of the variable display unit 67 cannot reach. Therefore, when aiming for winning in the lower working ball entering portion 62, it is necessary to fire the game ball to the area (left route) which is the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE.

  Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 for variably displaying symbols (variation display) using a winning at the operation ball entering portions 62 and 63 as a trigger.

  The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a big win is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or big win). The symbol display device 75 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

  The variable display unit 67 is provided with a center frame 76 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in this fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 are raised from the front surface of the game board 60. The gap dimension between the two is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). The route is roughly divided into the right route that detours from the left and the left route that detours from the left.

  Note that the above-described variable pitching device 65, the right-hand actuated pitching portion 63 and the through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and the game balls flowing down the left route are the variable pitching device 65, the right-hand actuated pitching ball. Winning the part 63 and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right route is prevented from winning the lower operation port 83a. For this reason, when the electric accessory 71 of the right-hand actuating entrance 63 is in the high-frequency support mode or in the opening / closing execution mode, it is advantageous to play the game by launching the game ball to the right route. In the low-frequency support mode, the game can be advantageously advanced by firing a game ball to the left route. That is, the player can advantageously advance the game by selecting the flow path of the game ball from the right route / left route according to the game situation.

  The operation entrance parts 62 and 63 are arranged at positions close to the variable display unit 67. Since a big win can be triggered by winning a prize at the working pitches 62 and 63, the player pays attention to whether or not the winning pitches 62 and 63 win and whether or not a big win will occur. It is considered that attention is paid to the symbol display device 75 for grasping. Providing the operation entrance parts 62 and 63 near the variable display unit 67 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 67.

  A main display unit 81 is disposed below the variable pitching device 65. The main display unit 81 is disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60 to the pachinko machine 10. The front surface of the main display unit 81 is opposed to the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the game area PE to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the rear glass panel 23. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the main display unit 81. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

  In the main display unit 81, a main display portion D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided at a portion facing the glass unit 22. The main display part D includes a display part DR for the right operation entry part that displays a lottery result based on winning in the lower operation entry part 62 (lower operation opening 62a), and a right operation entry part 63 (right side). And a right-hand actuated ball display unit DR for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the actuating port 63a).

  In the display part DR for the right-hand actuated pitching part, the display of the variation of the pattern is performed by using the winning of the actuated entry part 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the prize is awarded to the lower actuated entrance part 62. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operating ball entering section 62 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the change display is stopped on the right operating ball display section DR. Then, after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stop result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the right actuated ball display unit DR, the display of the variation of the picture is performed using the winning of the right actuated ball entering unit 63 as a trigger, and based on the winning of the right actuated ball entering unit 63 as a stop result of the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed is clearly indicated. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning in the right-hand actuated entry part 63 is a winning result corresponding to a big hit or special win, the change display is stopped at the display part DR for the right-hand actuated entry part and stopped. After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, on the basis of winning in any one of the activated ball entering parts 62, 63, the variable display is started in the corresponding activated ball display unit DL, DR, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variable display is displayed. This is equivalent to one game time until is stopped. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned content. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning is made to any of the operating ball entering parts 62 and 63, the single game area is only given. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. Once.

  The main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a first reservation number display part LS and a second reservation number display part RS. The first hold number display portion LS corresponds to the lower operation port 62a, and the number of times that the game ball has won the lower operation port 62a is held up to 4 times, and the first hold number display portion LS is held by lighting the first hold number display portion LS. A number is displayed. The second number-of-holds display section RS corresponds to the right-side operation port 63a, and the number of times that the game ball has won the right-side operation port 63a is retained up to a maximum of four times. It is displayed.

  In addition, the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate display unit DS for displaying a lottery result based on winning through the through gate 66. In the through gate display unit DS, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 66 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. It is clearly shown. When the result of the internal lottery (support lottery) based on the winning to the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the power release state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS. Then, after the change display is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 71 provided in the right operation ball entering portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is retained up to 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion D of the main display unit 81. A holding number display section DH is provided.

  About these each display part DL, DR, LS, RS, DS, DH, while being visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, these various display parts DL, DR, LS, Visibility is ensured by preventing the game ball from moving in front of RS, DS, and DH.

  The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. A game ball is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 so that the resin base 50 is fixed. On the other hand, it is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In the game board 60, a reverse prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball reaching the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 60.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return as foul balls in the guide passage 103, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing base 112 in the resin base 50 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14). A passage forming member is formed in the through hole. 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper dish path and a main body side lower dish path. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path and the main body side lower dish path is attached to the resin base 50 below the passage forming member 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, and further includes an urging member that urges the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path to a front position. Is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage or the main body side lower dish passage, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the stored balls spill out. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

  A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 disposed in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / production control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / production control device unit 142 includes a notification / production control device 610 and a mounting table 144, and the notification / production control device 610 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The notification / production control device 610 includes a notification / production control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device, which will be described later. It is accommodated in a substrate box 145 made of, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the back surface of the game board 60. The collective board 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a detection mechanism for detecting the entering of game balls into various winning ports, and the like.

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with a collecting passage corresponding to each of the various ball entering portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages go down along the back surface of the game board 60 from these entrances, and define the fall path of the game balls. The collection paths meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and any game balls that have passed through the ball-entry portion such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection path. It becomes. The exit portion of each recovery passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 68 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any prize opening is led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

  The detection mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors that individually correspond to various ball entering portions such as the general winning a prize opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage that is connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball falls in a state where the collection path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a ball entering a ball entrance such as the general winning award 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in a magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area is employed.

  These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (specifically, a main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collective plate 150 from the rear side, and includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any structure can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened.However, the box base and the box cover can be connected by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

<Back pack unit 15>
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool for fastening with respect to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating front end portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. The upper dish passage and the front door side upper dish path communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the main body side lower dish path and front door side lower dish path. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board 203, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply / launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 includes a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is fired by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604 may be included as another element.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors and the like provided in the main control device 162. The power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to a power supply / emission control device 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. In addition, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 151a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 151b for the lower operation entrance portion 62, a detection sensor 151c for the right operation entrance portion 63, and a variable entrance device 65 151d for detection and detection sensor 151e for through gate 66 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 151a to 151e, each entry section is received by MPU 602 of main controller 162. The winning determination (entry determination) is executed. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a big hit generation lottery based on winnings to the lower working ball entering portion 62 (lower working port 62a) and the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working port 63a), and to the through gate 66. A support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the.

  On the output side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / production control device 610 (specifically, a notification / production control board 611) are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 603a of the ROM 603 is referred to. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is output, and when the winning to the big winning opening 65a is specified, 15 gaming balls are output. When the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the game is output and the winning to the lower operation port 62a is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and the winning command to the right operation port 63a is received. Is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / production control device 610. In this case, the command information storage area 603a of the ROM 603 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, a driving unit 71b for driving the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operation ball entering unit 63, a variable ball driving unit 65c for driving the opening / closing door 65b of the variable ball entry device 65, a main display The number-of-holds display units LS, RS, and DH of the unit 81 and the display units DL, DR, and DS for various incoming balls are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable ball driving unit 65c in the variable ball driving device 65 so that the special winning opening 65a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electrified accessory 71 of the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is elected in the open state (support winning), the MPU 602 performs drive control of the drive unit 71b so that the electrified accessory 71 is opened and closed. The In each game round, the MPU 602 executes display control of the right working ball display unit DR or the right working ball display unit DR in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81.

  Furthermore, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power / fire control device 191, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 191. The payout control device 181 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41 are connected to the power source / launch control device 191. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects an operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and based on information from the operation level detection sensor, the game ball launch mechanism 110 emits a strength of the game ball (launch speed). ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information in the power / fire control device 191. It is the structure which can grasp | ascertain whether it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is operated, the game ball is fired. Will be allowed.

  Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, and thus to the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620, via the power supply / launch control device 191.

  The notification / production control device 610 includes a notification / production control board 611 on which an MPU 612 is mounted. The MPU 612 includes a ROM 613 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 613. A RAM 614 or the like, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing, is incorporated.

  The notification / production control device 610 controls driving of the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 620 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. Is. Specifically, in the notification / production control device 610, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 75 and the symbol stop display mode (for example, the symbol of the symbol to be finally stopped) are displayed. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach, the content of reach production, and the like are determined, and the determined content is assigned to the command and transferred to the display control device 620.

  The display control device 620 includes a display control board 621 on which an MPU 622 is mounted. The MPU 622 stores various control programs and a ROM 623 storing fixed value data, and various types of control programs stored in the ROM 623 are executed. A RAM 624 that is a memory for temporarily storing data, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM, and the like are incorporated. ing. The MPU 622 executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) based on the command input from the notification / production control device 610.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 75 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, and FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining symbols displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

  As shown in FIG. 6, on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity. In this case, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols (see FIG. 7).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen 75a is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display screen 75a. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same numerals) is formed on any effective line. When the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in the state of being played, the big hit video is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 symbol rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

  Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and if a probable jackpot result occurs, for example, the same specific symbols The combination of is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the normal display mode described in detail above and the special display mode when the special gaming state described later is set are set. In the special display mode, the variable display area of the symbol is set. Is reduced to the corner (lower right part) of the display screen 75a, and an image such as a character is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a. The display contents in the special display mode will be described later.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol rows, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the vertical direction.

  In the lower part of the display screen 75a, more specifically, below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol, which are set individually, The display area is set. The hold display area is the number of hold for the upper operation opening that is displayed in a divided manner so that the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 62a is arranged in the horizontal direction. The display area Da and the reserved number display area for the lower operation opening displayed in a divided manner so that the unit reservation display areas of the same number as the maximum reservation number when the game ball wins the right operation opening 63a are arranged in the horizontal direction. Db.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 62a, the maximum number of reservations is four, and in correspondence with this, the first unit reservation is held in the lower operation opening reservation number display area Da. A display area, a second unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set. In addition, when the game ball wins the right operation opening 63a, the maximum number of reservations is four. Correspondingly, the right operation opening reservation number display area Db includes a first unit reservation display area, A unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set.

For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 62a is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area, and the game ball is placed in the lower operation opening. When the number of holds when winning 62a is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area to the fourth unit hold display area. Note that FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the number of reservations in the lower operation port 62a is three and the number of reservations in the right operation port 63a is two.
<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in the lottery determination.

  The MPU 602 uses various counter information in the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display portion D (that is, setting of the light emission mode in the various display portions DL, DR, DS), setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 75, etc. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbol display Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when executing outlier fluctuation in the device 75, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and for the operation entrance part of the main display unit 81 The display unit DL, DR and the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in the symbol display device 75 are used. It is set to Rukoto. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 71 of the right operation entrance portion 63 is set in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 604a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. The RAM 604 is provided with a holding ball storage area 604b including a lower working ball holding area Ra, a right working ball holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total holding number storage area. . In the reserved ball storage area 604b, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are matched with the winning history of the game balls to the lower working ball entering section 62 or the right working ball entering section 63. Each value is stored in time series.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 604b of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working ball entering part 62 or the right working ball entering part 63. More specifically, the RAM 604 is stored in the lower working ball entry holding area Ra at the timing when the game ball is won in the lower working ball entering portion 62, and the RAM 604 is played at the timing when the game ball is won in the right working ball entering portion 63. Is stored in the holding area Rb for the right-hand side actuating entrance.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 603b as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the success / failure tables include a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 9 (a) and a high probability mode success / failure table (high) in FIG. 9 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit (that is, the winning information) is “7”, “307” and “508”. That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of “0 to 599”, “7”, “307”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the substantial jackpot probability by one lottery is 1/200. It has become. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number for winning the big hit (that is, the winning information) is “5”. ”,“ 7 ”,“ 36 ”...“ 572 ”,“ 598 ”. That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of “0 to 599”, “5”, “7”, “36”... “572”, “598” correspond to the jackpot result, and by one lottery The substantial jackpot probability is 1/20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. In each lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is a big hit, the game is missed.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable pitching device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Differences are set in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 71 of the right-hand operation entrance portion 63. Thereby, seven big hits are set roughly. Hereinafter, each of the above conditions will be described with reference to FIG. 10 as appropriate. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing the opening pattern of the special winning opening, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing the support pattern by the electric accessory 71.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), as a mode of opening / closing control of the variable pitching device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, the winning of the variable pitching device 65 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is performed. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency is relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 65a of the variable pitching device 65 is performed four times or eight times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The opening of the number of times is continued until 30 seconds (high frequency time) elapses or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 65a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 65a of the variable pitching device 65 is performed four times (number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0. The process continues until 06 seconds (low frequency time) elapses or until the number of winning prizes to the large winning opening 65a reaches 10 (low frequency number).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the game ball launch handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism is such that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. 110 is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of the lower large winning opening 64a is 0.06 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time for opening a single big winning opening is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, it is substantially difficult for the game ball to be won.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (or opening limitation period) for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, it is not limited to the above values as long as the occurrence frequency of winning in the big winning opening is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. is there. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, there is virtually no winning in the variable pitching device. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one big prize opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no winning for the variable pitching portion occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the support mode in the electrically-powered accessory 71 of the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is compared in a situation where game balls are continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. In such a case, the low-frequency support mode (the low-frequency support state or the low-frequency guide state) is set so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 71 of the right-hand actuated entrance 63 is opened per unit time is relatively high. The high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) is set.

  The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning an electric combination release state (support win) in an electric combination release lottery (support lottery) using the electric combination release counter C4. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is set higher than in the low frequency support mode. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a support lottery when a winning to the through gate 66 occurs during the high frequency support mode is 100%, and the through gate during the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning a support lottery when winning to 66 occurs is 20%.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 71 is opened when the support lottery is won is set to be the same (specifically, three times). A difference is set in the opening time per round. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the time for one release is set to 5 seconds, whereas in the low frequency support mode, the time for one release is set to 0.15 seconds. Has been.

  Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is 2 seconds after the next support lottery is performed after the support lottery is performed once, whereas in the low frequency support mode, the same amount is secured. The difference is set so that the time is 12 sec.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning in the right operation opening 63a of the right operation ball entry portion 63 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning in the lower working ball entering portion 62 (lower working port 62a) than the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working port 63a). In the high frequency support mode, the probability that a winning to the right operation entrance portion 63 (right operation port 63a) will occur is higher than the lower operation entrance portion 62 (lower operation port 62a). When a winning is made to the right working ball entering portion 63 (the right working port 63a), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. A game can be played while not decreasing.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the state where the power is released per unit time is higher than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, winning a support lottery In this case, a difference may be set in the number of times of opening. Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by making any one condition or any combination of conditions among the number of times of opening, the opening time, and the winning probability different.

  The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the retained ball in the RAM 604 is the timing when the game ball wins the lower working ball entering portion 62 (lower working port 62a) or the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working port 63a). It is stored in the storage area 604b. More specifically, at the timing when a game ball is won in the lower action entry portion 62 (lower action opening 62a), the RAM 604 is stored in the lower action entry portion holding area Ra, and the right action entry portion 63 (right side) The game ball is stored in the right-hand action ball holding area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the action port 63a).

<Distribution of game results>
The distribution destination of game results for the big hit type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the winning / not-lotting lottery and the lottery lottery) is assigned to the allocation table (allocation information) in the allocation table storage area 603c as the allocation information group storage means in the ROM 603. Group). Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, as the distribution table, a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the lower operation entrance part of FIG. 11 (a) and the right operation entry of FIG. 11 (b). A distribution table (second distribution information group) for departments is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the allocation table for the lower operation entry portion, as a distribution destination of game results, 4R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result), 4R normal jackpot result A (low 4R normal jackpot result B (low probability corresponding game result), 4R normal jackpot result C (low probability corresponding game result), and 4R normal jackpot result D (low probability corresponding game result) are set.

  The 4R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency winning mode is executed as the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won.

  The 4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency winning mode is executed as the open / close execution mode, and after the open / close execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high frequency support mode is continued until the number of game times executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

  In the 4R normal jackpot result B to the 4R normal jackpot result D, the low-frequency winning mode is executed as the open / close execution mode, and after the open / close execution mode is finished, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. It is a jackpot result. About this high frequency support mode, in the case of the normal jackpot result B, it is continued until the game times executed during the mode reaches 40 times, and in the case of the normal jackpot result C, it is executed during the mode. The game is continued until the game number reaches 60 times, and in the case of the normal jackpot result D, it is continued until the game number executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

  In the distribution table for the lower working ball entry portion, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 49”, “0 to 24” corresponds to the 4R probability variation big hit result, and “25 to 34” is set. It corresponds to 4R normal jackpot result A, “35 to 39” corresponds to 4R normal jackpot result B, “40 to 44” corresponds to normal jackpot result C, and “45 to 49” Usually corresponds to the jackpot result D.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the allocation table for the right-hand actuated entrance, as the game result allocation destination, 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low (Probability game result) is set.

  The 8R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency winning mode is executed as the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won.

  The 8R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency winning mode is executed as the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode is continued until the number of game times executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

  In the distribution table for the lower action entry portion, “0-24” corresponds to the 8R probability variation big hit result among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0-49”, and “25-49” 8R usually corresponds to jackpot results.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of entering the high-frequency winning mode when the big win is won based on the winning to the right working ball entering portion 63 (the right working port 63a) is the lower working ball entering portion 62 (lower side). The probability that the high-frequency winning mode is set when the jackpot is won based on the winning at the operating port 62a) is set high. That is, the advantage of entering the right working entrance 63 is set higher than the advantage of entering the lower working entrance 62.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of combinations of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 in the case where various jackpot results are obtained by the above-described lottery determination and distribution lottery.

  As already described, on the display screen 75a, there are three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows, and the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row are nine types of main symbols “1” to “9”. The middle symbol row is composed of 10 types of main symbols “0” to “9” and the sub symbols arranged between these main symbols. It has.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 4R probability variation jackpot result or 8R probability variation jackpot result occurs, The same combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on one of the above-mentioned effective lines (see FIG. 6), and then an explicit image that clearly indicates that a probable big hit has occurred is displayed.

  In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”, and if the 4R normal jackpot result A or the 8R normal jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines (see FIG. 6), and then an image for clarification indicating that a normal jackpot has occurred is displayed.

  When the 4R normal jackpot results B to D are reached, the combination of the same symbol is stopped by the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row, and on the same line as the active line on which both symbols are waiting ( The “0” symbol (almighty symbol) in the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed on the reach line (to be described later). When the jackpot result corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode is obtained, the jackpot type is not explicitly shown on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

  In addition, the result of the lottery determination is clearly shown in the operation entrance part display units DL and DR of the main display unit D described above. In the operation entrance part display units DL and DR, the above-mentioned jackpot type is also distinguished and displayed, but in each operation entrance part display unit DL and DR, the operation entrance part display unit DL, The pattern corresponding to each jackpot is diversified by individually turning on / off the plurality of LEDs constituting the DR and changing the color development pattern in various ways. As a result, even if the operation entrance ball display units DL and DR are visually confirmed, it is difficult to identify the jackpot type.

  Referring to FIG. 8 again, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), the reach random number counter C3 returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the reserved ball in the RAM 604 is reached at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation entrance 62 (lower operation port 62a) or the right operation entrance 63 (right operation port 63a). It is stored in the storage area 604b. More specifically, at the timing when a game ball is won in the lower action entry portion 62 (lower action opening 62a), the RAM 604 is stored in the lower action entry portion holding area Ra, and the right action entry portion 63 (right side) The game ball is stored in the right-hand action ball holding area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the action port 63a). Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether to generate a reach.

  However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode (game times that are won in the winning / failing lottery), the MPU 602 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 except for the special game state described later. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the game result is a game result corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode. In the gaming machine, in the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display can be a special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 75 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to be obtained in the previous stage.

  In other words, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a stage before the end of the symbol display, the combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents on the display screen 75a will be described in more detail. First, when the symbol variation display is terminated in the right symbol column, and the symbol variation display is terminated in the left symbol column, the symbol hits one of the effective lines. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the numbers that make up the combination, and reach is achieved by displaying the symbols in the middle symbol row in the situation where the reach lines are formed. Display. When a big hit occurs, the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination of winning symbols together with the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. Is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS includes a variation display time in the right working ball display unit DR and a right working ball display unit DR of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), and a symbol variation in the symbol display device 75. This is used for determining the display time in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is determined when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the right actuation ball display unit DR and the right actuation ball display unit DR and when the symbol display device 75 starts symbol variation. Is acquired.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric combination reservation area 604c of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 71 of the right operation ball entry portion 63 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 71 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 71 is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, in the MPU 602, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the right actuation ball display unit DR and the right actuation ball display unit DR. In the determination, the variable display time table storage area 603d of the ROM 603 is used. Further, the MPU 602 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, in the right action ball entry display section DR and the right action ball entry section display section DR. The stop result is determined, and the stop result table storage area 603e of the ROM 603 is used for the determination.

<Various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control board 601>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 602 of the main control board 601 will be described. The processing of the MPU 602 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a normal processing that is executed after the main processing ends, and a timer interrupt processing that is started by periodically interrupting the normal processing. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing will be described first, followed by normal processing.
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors, for example (the detection sensors 151a to 151e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, if it is determined that a ball has entered the lower working port 62a, a winning detection flag for the lower working ball portion is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604, and the right working port 63a is filled. When it is determined that a winning has occurred, a winning detection flag for the right actuating entering portion is stored in the various flag storage area 604e. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 66, a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In the subsequent step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 66 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If the same flag is stored, it is stored in the electric utility reservation area. On the condition that the number of stored accessory holdings is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electronic combination holding area. If the through-gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e, the winning detection flag for the through-gate is terminated after deleting the winning detection flag.

After performing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in step S105, the winning for the working ball part according to the winning in the working ball parts 62, 63 (working ports 62a, 63a). Execute the processing and end this timer interrupt processing.
<Winning process for the working pitcher>
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 13 and FIG.

  In step S201, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) in the lower action ball entry portion 62 (lower action opening 62a) is detected in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 for the lower action ball entry portion. Judgment is made based on whether or not a flag is stored. If it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, if a detection signal indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating ball entering portion 62 (lower operating port 62a) is received, step Proceeding to S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls is set.

  In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operation ball entry portion 62 (lower operation port 62a) is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. . As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the lower working ball entry portion 62 (lower working port 62a).

  Thereafter, in step S204, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the holding area Ra for the lower operating ball entry portion is read, and the start-holding storage number RaN stored in the holding area Ra is set (hereinafter referred to as “reserved number of storages”). , Also referred to as the starting reserved memory number RaN for the lower working entry portion). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the lower operation entry portion 62 (lower operation opening 62a), the process proceeds to step S206. In step S <b> 206, the determination is made based on whether or not a winning detection flag for the right-hand acted pitching portion is stored in various flag storage areas 604 e of the RAM 604. If it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, if the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the right-hand actuated pitching unit 63, the process proceeds to step S 207 and the payout control device 181. Set a prize ball command to pay out 4 game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in an external output process S401 of a normal process described later.

  In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that the game ball has won the right operation ball entry portion 63 (right operation port 63a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working port 63a).

  Thereafter, in step S209, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the holding area Rb for the right-hand actuated entrance is read, and the start-up storage number RbN stored in the reservation area Rb is set (hereinafter, referred to as “reserved number RbN”). (Also referred to as the start-up storage number RbN for the right-hand actuated entrance part). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in both processes of steps S201 and S206, that is, if no game ball is won in either the lower working ball entering part 62 or the right working ball entering part 63, the book is left as it is. The winning process is terminated.

  Here, the information acquisition processing in step S205 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Information acquisition process>
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). judge. If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the corresponding start display storage number N of the corresponding result display area holding area is set in step S302. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total pending count storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as common pending count CRN) is incremented by 1.

  In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the free storage area area of the corresponding result display area reservation area. Of these, the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  In other words, when the start pending storage number RaN for the lower working entry part is set, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103. Are stored in the first storage area in the free storage area of the holding area Ra for the lower working entry portion, that is, the start holding storage number RaN for the lower working entry portion incremented by 1 in step S302. Store in the corresponding reserved area Ra.

  In addition, when the start pending storage number RbN for the right-hand actuated entrance is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the right side. Stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the holding area Rb for the working entry part, that is, the holding area Rb corresponding to the start holding storage number RbN for the right action entry part incremented by 1 in step S302. .

  In subsequent step S305 and step S306, a notification / effect control device 610, which is a control device on the sub-side (sub-side), and display control, that a winning in the lower operation entrance portion 62 or the right operation entrance portion 63 has occurred. A holding information confirmation process and a holding command setting process, which are processes for causing the device 620 to recognize the information, are executed. Thereafter, when the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is erased and the information acquisition process is terminated.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S306 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in a normal process external output process (step S401) described later. A detailed description of each process in steps S305 and S306 will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S401 to S407 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a command for an effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, it is notified. Transmit to the production control device 610. Further, output setting for the external terminal board 213 is performed according to information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

  Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S403, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game number is executed. In this game times control process, determination of success / failure of jackpot or the like and allocation determination of jackpot type, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 75, and operation entrance portion in the main display unit 81 (main display portion D) Display control of the display units DL, DR, etc. is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S404, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 405, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 71 provided in the right operation entrance portion 63 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the electronic combination release indicating whether or not to make the electric combination 71 open using the numerical information acquired from the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electronic combination holding area 604c of the RAM 604 is performed. A lottery (support lottery) is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 71 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit DS in the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role release lottery.

  As already described, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the mode of support by the electric accessory 71, and the transition to any one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 71 is in the open state is set more frequently when the electrified open state is won than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 71 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  In a succeeding step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined operation is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch controller 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once in a firing period (for example, 0.6 sec). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S407, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602 and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes to be executed repeatedly has been completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S408, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S410, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that the power failure flag has been set, a power shutdown has occurred, and therefore the power interruption process from step S411 is executed. That is, in step S411, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S411. After the access to the RAM 604 is prohibited in step S413, the power supply is completely shut down and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Here, the game times control process of step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game turn control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process after step S502, that is, the game turn start process at steps S503 to S505 and the game turn progress process at steps S506 to S509 are not executed. The control process ends.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the display unit DL, DR for the operation entrance part of the main display unit D is in a variable display. When the display for operation ball entry part is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S503 to S505. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of start holding balls (common holding number CRN) is “0”. The case where the common holding number CRN is “0” means that the holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 604b. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the common holding number CRN is not “0”, the display is changed based on the data stored in the holding area Ra for the lower working entry portion or the holding area Rb for the right operation entry portion in step S504. Execute data setting processing to set for use.

<Data setting process>
In the data setting process, first of all the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the lower working entrance and the holding area Rb for the right working entrance is stored in which holding area Ra, Rb. Determine. Then, the following processing is executed for the holding area where the oldest holding information is stored. In the following description, first, the case where the lower working ball holding portion holding area Ra is targeted will be described, and then the case where the right working ball holding portion holding area Rb is targeted will be described.

  First, the starting holding ball number RaN and the common holding number CRN of the holding area Ra for the lower working ball entry part are decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the holding area Ra for the lower working ball entry part is executed. Move to area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data (namely, holding information) stored in each area of the holding area Ra for lower side action entrance parts is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area.

  Subsequently, a shift command that is information for causing the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 620 via the notification / effect control device 610 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The display control device 620 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display in the reserved number display area Da for the lower action entry part corresponding to the decrease in the reserved number.

  On the other hand, in the case where the right working ball holding area holding area Rb is the target, first, the start holding ball number RbN and the common holding number CRN of the right working ball holding area Rb are decremented by one, The data stored in the first area of the holding area Rb for the lower working entry portion is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data (namely, holding | maintenance information) stored in each area of the holding area Rb for right side operation | movement entrance parts is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area.

  Subsequently, a shift command that is information for causing the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 620 via the notification / effect control device 610 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The display control device 620 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display in the reserved number display area Db for the right-hand actuated entry portion in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

  After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S505, the change display on the main display unit 81 (specifically, the display section DL, DR for the operation ball entry part of the main display part D) and the change in the symbol display device 75 are performed. After executing the change start process for starting the display, the game times control process is ended.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the variation start process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S601, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. The high probability mode flag is stored in various flag storage areas 604e when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a probabilistic jackpot result, and is erased when the next jackpot occurs. Flag.

  When it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, the determination result table is used for determining whether or not the information stored in the execution area AE is referred to the high probability mode determination table among the tables stored in the determination table storage area 603b. It is determined whether the information, that is, the numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. When it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to by referring to the low probability mode determination table among the tables stored in the determination table storage area 603b. It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to is consistent with the low probability jackpot numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S602, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S601 is a result corresponding to the big win. If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S603.

  In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2, is grasped, and the numerical information of this time is used for the lower side operation entry It is determined whether it is based on the entrance to the part 62 or based on the entrance to the right operation entrance part.

  When the numerical information on the big hit type counter C2 is the numerical information based on the entry into the lower operation entry unit 62, the lower operation of the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 603c. With reference to the allocation table for the entrance part, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information concerning the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to 4R probability variable jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A to 4R normal jackpot result D.

  When the numerical information concerning the big hit type counter C2 is numerical information based on the entrance to the right operation entrance unit 63, the right operation entrance of the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 603c. With reference to the distribution table for department, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information relating to the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result.

  In a succeeding step S604, it is determined whether or not the type of winning the big hit is a probable big hit result based on the information specified in the type determining process in the step S603. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S606. If it is determined in step S602 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S607.

  In each stop result setting process of step S605 to step S607, the information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 603e of the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S605 and step S606, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S605, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S606.

  After executing any one of steps S605 to S607, in step S608, a variable display time setting process is executed.

<Variable display time setting process>
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is set. In the present embodiment, when any of 4R normal jackpot result B to 4R normal jackpot result D is won, the game shifts to the special game state after the jackpot is over. In this special game state, the setting mode of the variable display time is different from the normal time. The variable display time setting process under the special gaming state shown in step S702 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either a probable big hit flag or a normal big hit flag is stored in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, that is, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a result of losing, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 75 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S704 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence or absence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to.

  If an affirmative determination is made in either step S703 or step S704, the process proceeds to step S705, and this time with reference to the reach generation change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 603d of the ROM 603. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the like is acquired, and in the subsequent step S706, the fluctuation display time information is provided in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604). ). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the reach display can be executed when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the winning / losing lottery is a result of losing and winning the lottery for generating the reach. It has become.

  Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display which have different display modes. The variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation. By referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS. By referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  Further, the reach generation variation display time table corresponds to the jackpot type. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped in the case of a probable jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped in the case of a normal jackpot result. In addition, the variable display time is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S704, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 603d in step S707. In step S708, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number N of starting reserved balls increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of starting reserved balls N may be used. The smaller the number of starting reserved balls N, the shorter the variation display time is. Also good. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined using parameters such as the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, the value of the variation type counter, and the like. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  Returning to the description of the change start process (FIG. 17), after the change display time setting process is executed in step S608, a change command and a type command are set in step S609. The change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on miss results, and the like.

  The change command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the notification / production control device 610, based on the received variation command and type command, the light emission pattern of the display lamp units 24 to 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game times are determined and determined. The display lamp units 24 to 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that the contents of the effect are executed. Further, the notification / production control device 610 determines a variation display pattern in the symbol display device 75 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and executes the determined variation display pattern. Then, the information for specifying the variation display pattern is added to the variation command and the type command while the information form is maintained, and is transmitted to the display control device 620. After that, in step S610, the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit DL and DR for the activated ball entering portion of the main display portion D, and then the variation start processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 16), when the action entry part display parts DL and DR of the main display part D are in a variable display, the process for proceeding the game times in steps S506 to S509 is performed. Run. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 18) as described above. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the display part DL, DR for the operation entrance part of the main display part D is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S508. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any one of the above steps S605 to S607 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the display unit DL and DR for the operation entrance part of the main display unit D. Then, the display unit DL, DR for operating ball entry is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed.

In the subsequent step S509, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The change end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 610 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 620 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 620 displays the final stop symbol combination in the game round by definite display (final stop display) by receiving the change end command.
<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and whether or not it is the timing when the display of the variation of the pattern in the lower action entry display part DL or the right action entry part display part DR of one game time is finished. Determine. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If the variable display has been completed, more specifically, if the preset stop display period has elapsed since the completion of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, and the game result ( It is determined whether the result of the lottery determination) corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the RAM 604 stores any one of a 4R probability variable jackpot result correspondence flag, an 8R probability variation jackpot result correspondence flag, a 4R normal jackpot result A correspondence flag to a 4R normal jackpot result D correspondence flag, and an 8R normal jackpot result correspondence flag. It is determined whether or not. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, first, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to a jackpot result corresponding to 8R.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, “8” is set in the open number counter OC provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S805, “4” is set in the release number counter OC. The number-of-opening counter OC is a counter for counting the number of times the variable pitching device 65 (large winning opening 65a) is opened.

  After executing the processing of step S806 or step S807, the process proceeds to step S808, and it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the flag corresponds to any of 4R probability variable jackpot result, 8R probability variable jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 8R normal jackpot result. If the current flag is one of these various flags, the high-frequency winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If the current flag does not correspond to the above-described flag, that is, the flag Is one corresponding to any of 4R normal jackpot result B to 4R normal jackpot result D, a low-frequency winning mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of RAM 604. In the opening / closing process of the special winning opening described later, the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 65a (variable winning device 65) is changed in accordance with the low frequency winning mode flag / high frequency winning mode flag.

  After executing the process of step S809 or step S810, an opening command is set in step S811. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 610 determines the contents of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the contents of the decided production are executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 610 to the display control device 620 as a display content command. In the display control device 620, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / production control device 610, the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image display of the character or the like, the background image, etc. are switched.

  Here, the opening command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Opening command setting process>
In the opening command setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is either the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902 to set the first type opening command. Based on the first type opening command, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 displays a message prompting the game ball to be launched toward the variable pitching device 65 and the transition to the high probability state is confirmed. The effect is notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S903, and it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is either the 4R normal jackpot result A or the 8R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, the process proceeds to step S904 to set the second type opening command. Based on the second type opening command, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 displays a message for prompting the game ball to be launched toward the variable pitching device 65 and confirms the shift to the high frequency support mode. You will be notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode is any of the 4R normal jackpot result B to the 4R normal jackpot result D, the process proceeds to step S905 to set the third type opening command. .

  In the display screen 75a in the present embodiment, as a means for suggesting whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player, a configuration is adopted in which the stay stage is shifted by switching the background image. The stay stage includes a normal stage that suggests that the gaming state is likely to be in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, a continuation stage corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a high gaming state. It is a support mode, and is set as a special high-accuracy stage that is set so that the winning probability is pseudo-multiple and a precursor stage that suggests that it is a pre-stage to shift to the special high-accuracy stage. When the third type opening command is received, a transition from the normal stage to the precursor stage to the special high-accuracy stage is performed as an effect indicating the promotion to the high-accuracy stage in the opening / closing execution mode opening on the display screen 75a. It will be. There are a plurality of stages with different advantages in the special high-accuracy stage, and it is suggested to which special high-accuracy stage to be transferred during the precursor stage.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 19) again, after executing the process of step S811, the external signal setting process is performed in step S812, and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  In the external signal setting process in step S812, it is determined whether or not any of the various jackpot correspondence flags is stored in the RAM 604. If any of the flags is stored, management control on the game hall side is performed. Preparations are made to output a signal indicating that a jackpot has occurred in the device (hall computer HC), and the signal is transmitted to the management control device in step S401 of normal processing (FIG. 15). Based on this signal, the management control device can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Returning to the description of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is being performed, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the opening standby time has elapsed, a special winning opening / closing process is executed in step S814. Here, the special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
In the big prize opening / closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 65a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable pitch driving unit 65c in the variable pitching device 65. If the big prize opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether the value of the open number counter OC is “0”, and whether the value of the open timer counter TC is “0” in step S1003. Determine whether. The opening timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening period or interval period of the special winning opening 65a, and the value is decremented by “1” every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. The

  When the value of the opening number counter OC is “0” or when the value of the opening timer counter TC is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the opening number counter OC is not “0” and the value of the opening timer counter TC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1005 and the opening process of the big winning opening 65a in the variable pitching device 65 is performed. Run. Specifically, the variable ball driving unit 65c is driven to open the special winning opening 65a. Then, the process of step S1005-S1008 is performed as the setting process (setting process for opening | release time) corresponding to the variable pitching apparatus 65. FIG.

  That is, in step S1005, whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the high-frequency winning mode, that is, corresponds to any of 4R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 8R normal jackpot result. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, the determination in step S1005 is made based on which of the high frequency winning mode flag / low frequency winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, “15000” (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC and “10” is set in the winning counter PC in step S1006. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1005, “30” (corresponding to 0.06 sec) is set in the release timer counter TC, and “10” is set in the winning counter PC.

  Thereafter, an opening command 10 is set in step S1009, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set release command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This release command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. In the notification / production control device 610, in the high-frequency winning mode, the content of the production corresponding to the received release command is determined, and various devices are controlled so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 65a is open, the process proceeds to step S1010, and it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is “0”. If the value of the release timer counter TC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1011 to determine whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 65a based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 151d corresponding to the variable pitching device 65. Judgment. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, a winning command output process is executed in step S1012. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 610, and the effect in the opening / closing execution mode executed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is changed by the winning command.

  After executing the command output process in step S1012, the process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1013, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the succeeding step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. finish.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1014, that is, if the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1012 (that is, it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is “0”). ) Means that the special winning opening closing condition has been established. In this case, in step S1015, the variable ball driving unit 65c is set in a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 65a.

  In the subsequent step S1016, update processing of the release number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the opening number counter OC is not “0”, the opening number counter OC is decremented by 1 and when the value of the opening number counter OC is “0”, the opening number counter OC is decremented. The value of “0” is maintained as “0”. Thereafter, in step S1017, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter OC is “0”. If the value of the opening number counter OC is not “0”, it is determined in step S1018 whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the high-frequency winning mode.

  If it is in the high frequency winning mode, “1000” (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC in step S1019, and if it is in the low frequency winning mode, the open timer counter TC is set in step S1020. “250” (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time during which the big winning opening 65a is closed between rounds is set shorter than the time during which the large winning opening 65a is closed in the high-frequency winning mode.

  In the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode, the time when the former is in the open state and the time when the closed state is closed are set longer. The execution time of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode is longer than the execution time of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode.

  Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S1021, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This closing command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. The notification / production control device 610 determines the content of the production corresponding to the closed command based on the received closure command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1017 that the value of the opening number counter OC is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S1022. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 604 d of the RAM 604. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1023, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

  As for the ending command in the present embodiment, the first type ending command to the third type ending command are set according to the situation at the time of transition to the opening / closing execution mode, etc., as in the above opening command, The stage (background image or the like) to be transferred later is determined and displayed according to these various commands.

  Specifically, when the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to either the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R probability variation jackpot result, the first type ending command is set. Based on the first type ending command, the stay stage transition process is terminated on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the transition process to the continuation stage is completed.

  If the setting condition of the first type ending command is not satisfied and the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result A and the 8R normal jackpot result, the second type ending command is set. . Based on the second type ending command, the stay stage transition process is terminated on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the transition process to the chance stage in which 100 high-frequency support modes are determined is completed.

  If the setting conditions of the first type ending command and the second type ending command are not met, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode is any of 4R normal jackpot result B to 4R normal jackpot result D, the third type ending Set the command. Based on the third type ending command, the stay stage transition process is completed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the transition process from the precursor stage to the special high accuracy stage is completed.

  Note that the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 stores the special game state flag in the various flag storage areas 614a of the RAM 614 when the third type ending command is received. While the special game state flag is stored, various display effects executed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 are switched to those corresponding to the special game state. It will be described later. Incidentally, the special gaming state flag is deleted when the high frequency support mode falls to the low frequency support mode.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 19), after executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”. In S816, it is determined whether or not the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the release number counter OC is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the opening number counter OC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S817, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, End the state transition process.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, one of the features is that a difference occurs in the advantage of the gaming state to be transferred through the opening / closing execution mode, and the game mode is diversified by the configuration related to the feature. It is illustrated. Hereinafter, the structure concerning the said characteristic is demonstrated.

<Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode>
Hereinafter, the transition process (step S817) at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result triggered by the current opening / closing execution mode is the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the corresponding flag is stored in either the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R probability variation jackpot result in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102, and the flag relating to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 is erased, and if a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, etc. are stored, these flags are erased. .

  After executing the erasure process in step S1102, the process proceeds to steps S1103 and S1104 to execute a game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S1103, a high probability mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the success / failure lottery in the subsequent game times is referred to the success / failure table for the high-probability mode.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  After the game state setting process is performed in steps S1103 and S1104, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is not a probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, it is determined whether the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the 4R normal jackpot result B or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 4R normal jackpot result B correspondence flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106, and the flag relating to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 is erased, and if a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, etc. are stored, these flags are erased. .

  After executing the erasure process in step S1106, the process proceeds to steps S1107 and S1108 to execute a game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S1107, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. In the subsequent step S1108, “40” is set to the game number counter GC1 stored in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604. As a result, the high frequency support mode is maintained until the game times are performed 40 times after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode when “40” is reached. .

  After the game state setting process is performed in steps S1107 and S1108, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1105, if a negative determination is made in step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, it is determined whether the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the 4R normal jackpot result C or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 4R normal jackpot result C correspondence flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1110, and the flag relating to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 is erased, and if a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, etc. are stored, these flags are erased. .

  After executing the erasure process in step S1110, the process proceeds to steps S1111 and S1112 to execute a game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S1111, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. In subsequent step S1112, "60" is set to the game number counter GC1 stored in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until the game is performed 60 times after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode when “60” is reached. .

  After the game state setting process is performed in step S1111 and step S1112, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1109, if a negative determination is made in step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1113. In step S1113, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the 4R normal jackpot result D. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 4R normal jackpot result D correspondence flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1113, the process proceeds to step S1114, and the flag relating to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 is erased, and if a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, etc. are stored, these flags are erased. .

  After executing the erasure process in step S1114, the process proceeds to steps S1115 and S1116 to execute a game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S1115, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. In the subsequent step S1116, “80” is set to the game number counter GC1 stored in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604. As a result, the high frequency support mode is maintained until the number of game times is 80 times after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode when reaching 80. .

  After the game state setting process is performed in steps S1115 and S1116, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1113, if a negative determination is made in step S1113, that is, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the 4R normal jackpot result A or the 8R normal jackpot result, Proceeding to S1117, the flag relating to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. Specifically, the jackpot result correspondence flag stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 is erased, and if a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, etc. are stored, these flags are erased. .

  After executing the erasure process in step S1117, the process proceeds to steps S1118 and S1119 to execute a game state setting process. Specifically, first, in step S1118, the high frequency support mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electronic support processing, the success / failure table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the pattern change display time at the time of the support lottery It is shortened (more specifically, it is set to 2.0 sec), and further, the period in which it is opened by one opening is extended (more specifically, it is set to 5.0 sec).

  Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the normal jackpot result. In the subsequent step S1119, “100” is set to the game number counter GC1 stored in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604. As a result, the high frequency support mode is maintained until the game times are performed 100 times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode when “100” is reached. .

  After the game state setting process is performed in steps S1118 and S1119, the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  As described above in detail, in this embodiment, there are various types of jackpot results, and the difference between advantages and disadvantages is set for the game state to be shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. However, it is assumed that simply by setting a difference in the number of times the benefits of the high frequency support mode can be enjoyed, the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game state described above does not work well. Therefore, in view of such circumstances, in this embodiment, a special gaming state (pseudo high probability state or pseudo state) in which the probability of winning a pseudo jackpot is increased using the difference in the number of high frequency support modes. One of the features is that a high probability zone) is provided. Hereinafter, a configuration related to the realization of the function will be described.

<Special gaming state>
When the 4R normal jackpot result B to the 4R normal jackpot result D are won, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode is set. For this reason, the period required for digestion of the opening / closing execution mode is extremely short as compared with the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. That is, the normal gaming state is immediately shifted to the high frequency support mode via the opening / closing execution mode.

  As described above, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode is finished, the game progress pattern is different from that after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result. In order to notify the transition, the video indicating the transition to the special game state is displayed during the opening / closing execution mode, and the symbol display device 75 is displayed based on the end of the video display (precursor game state). The display mode on the display screen 75a changes.

  In the MPU 622 of the display control device 620, the display change process in the special game state is executed as part of the normal process that is periodically executed. Specifically, the display screen of the symbol display device 75 is based on the reception of an ending command related to the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode from the main control device 162 via the notification / production control device 610. A display change process is performed to make the display of 75a correspond to the special game state. Hereinafter, the change in the display mode will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 23A and the schematic diagram in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the display change process in the special game state, first, the change process of the variable display area ME is performed in step S1201. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23 (b1) → FIG. 23 (b2), the variable display area ME is expanded.

  In the subsequent step S1202, change processing of the variable display content is performed. As described above, in the normal gaming state, the symbol row is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. And is reduced and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 provided in the right corner of the display screen 75a. A character image (moving image) simulating a girl is displayed (animated) in the first variation display area ME1 in the center of the display screen 75a. Although details will be described later, in the special game state, the character performs various actions, and for example, encounters a fairy during the special game state, thereby notifying that the player has won the jackpot.

  After executing the process of step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and a process of hiding the hold display on the display screen 75a is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 23B, the hold display displayed on the display screen 75a (specifically, the hold number display areas Da and Db) in the normal gaming state is hidden. The sudden disappearance of the hold display can be a cause for confusion to the player. In this regard, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such inconvenience by passing through the above-mentioned precursor game state (by making the hold display non-display in the precursor game state). In addition, about the holding | maintenance number display part LS and RS in which display control is performed by the main controller 162, even if it is in a special gaming state, the display function of a holding number is ensured similarly to a normal gaming state.

  After executing the process of step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204, and a display process for displaying the number counter on the display screen 75a is performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23B, the remaining number of special game states is displayed in the upper corner (the number display area CE) of the display screen 75a. Although details will be described later, in the special gaming state, one display effect is executed over a plurality of game times in the variable display area ME1, and the display counter executes the display effect. The remaining number of times is displayed.

  After executing the preparatory processes in steps S1201 to S1204, the special game that has shifted to the display screen 75a is shown in order to clearly indicate which special game state has been shifted among the plurality of special game states that are set to have different degrees of advantage. Processing for displaying an opening image for notifying the type of state is performed.

  As described in detail above, in the special game state, a pseudo high probability state with a limited number of times is created by devising the effect display executed on the display screen 75a. In the present embodiment, the hold information transmitted from the main control device is referred to when determining the display effect. Therefore, in the following description, first, processing that is a premise of display mode determination executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 and 25.

<Pending information confirmation process>
First, the hold information confirmation process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) will be described. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, in the hold information confirmation process, first, in step S1301, the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb of the hold ball storage area 604b and the hold information are stored. The common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number storage area of the ball storage area 604b is read, and information on the hold number is stored in the register of the MPU 602. Thereafter, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the winning information is included in the hold information acquired by the current winning.

  Specifically, first, in step S1302, jackpot determination information out of the hold information acquired in step S103 based on the current winning in the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a, that is, the acquired jackpot random number The value of the counter C1 is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S1303, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If it is in the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the information for determining the jackpot (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 with reference to the low probability mode determination table is information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Determine if it is in the group. In the case of the high probability mode, the process advances to step S1305, and the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 with reference to the above-described success / failure table for the high probability mode is a jackpot. Specify whether it is included in the information set as a winner.

  After step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1307, and the confirmation processing of the reservation information is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the special gaming state is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode via the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to any of 4R normal jackpot result B to 4R normal jackpot result D is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1308, the confirmation processing for the hold information is terminated without performing the confirmation processing for the occurrence of reach at the time of detachment described below.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, the information on the reach reach determination in the hold information acquired in step S1304 based on the current winning to the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped. To do.

  In the following step S1310, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S1309 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

  After executing the process of step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1309 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S1312, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold command setting process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, so that the information for determining the jackpot in the immediately preceding hold information confirmation process (FIG. 24). It is determined whether or not is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S1402 to set a jackpot handling pending command. Note that the above-described command setting and various command settings described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that no jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S1403, and whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. It is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding hold information confirmation process (FIG. 24). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a release reach hold command is set in step S1604, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete release hold command is set in step S1605.

  When the hold command is set in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, etc. The time-consuming information is stored in the pending command. When the variable display time is determined, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as the variable display time setting process shown in step S608 (see FIG. 17). The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 620, and the display control device 620 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command.

  After executing the command setting process of any one of step S1402, step S1404, and step S1405, in step S1406, a process of setting the number of hold information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S1406, first the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1301 in the confirmation processing of the previous hold information (FIG. 24) is read, and then in the hold command already set. The read information on the reserved number is stored in the reserved number information bit by an arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, for the hold command set in any one of steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, information for specifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command Will be included. After executing the process of step S1406 described in detail above, the hold command setting process is terminated.

  Note that the hold command including the information on the number of hold in step S1406 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 15). The notification / production control device 610 specifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. Also, the notification / production control device 610 transmits the hold command to the display control device 620 while maintaining the form. The display control device 620 executes various effects such as prefetch effects based on the received hold command.

  In addition, the setting method of the hold command is determined by whether or not the display control device 620 holds the jackpot, whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot at that time, if the jackpot is not won, the presence or absence of reach, etc. Any design can be used as long as it can identify the variation display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding pending command, a miss reach pending command, and a complete miss pending command is individually set corresponding to the number of each pending, and in the pending command setting process, the pending information confirmation process (see FIG. It is also possible to select one pending command in accordance with the confirmation result in 23).

  Next, a command corresponding to a hold command among command response processes executed by the notification / production control device 610 when a command is transmitted from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 610 (hereinafter referred to as a hold command). Will be described. The pending command handling process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  In the pending command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot handling command has been received. Here, the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 receives a command from the main control device 162, and the received command is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 614. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Processing corresponding to the command can be executed satisfactorily. In determining the command, it is determined whether or not a big hit correspondence pending command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area. It should be noted that this command read configuration is the same for the following command read.

  When the jackpot corresponding hold command has been received, information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified number of holds is stored in the erasure counter stored in the various counter areas 614b of the RAM 614. Set. As will be described later, the information on the number of reserves set in the erasure counter is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time a new game is started.

  Thereafter, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is set in the hold information storage area of the RAM 614 (specifically, the youngest area among the areas where the hold information is not stored in the first area to the fourth area), and the hold command handling process is performed. finish.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration of the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area has the first area to the fourth area as described above, and is configured to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side when a shift command is received from the main control device 162, that is, when game play is started. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, and the fourth area → the third area. . In the holding ball storage area 604b of the main controller 162, the lower working ball holding area Ra and the right working ball holding area Rb are provided separately. Also for the holding information storage area 610, there are provided first area to fourth area for the lower working entry part and first area to fourth area for the right action entry part, respectively. The hold information is stored in time series.

  Note that, as already described, in the present embodiment, the hold information related to the right working ball entering portion 63 is digested with priority over the hold information relating to the lower working ball entering portion 62. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When there is no such priority relationship, the hold information storage area is formed by the first area to the eighth area, and the hold information may be stored in time series regardless of the destination. Is possible.

  Incidentally, also in the display control device 620, the same command determination processing as the processing executed in the above-described notification / production control device 610 is executed, and when the holding information is acquired, the game times related to the holding information are changed. It is possible to know whether or not the jackpot is won before it starts.

  In the present embodiment, when the special game state is entered, a special display effect (special variation display) is executed on the display screen 75a. The outline of the special display effect is determined by the notification / effect control device 610, and the display control device 620 is configured to determine a detailed effect mode based on the determined information.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26, the process (special variation aspect determination process) for determining the outline | summary of the said special display effect performed with the alerting | reporting / production control apparatus 610 is demonstrated. This process is executed as part of a normal process that is periodically executed by the notification / production control device 610.

  Note that the special variation mode determination process is a process that is executed when the special gaming state is set, specifically, the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to any of the 4R normal jackpot result B to the 4R normal jackpot result D described above. This process is executed during the high-frequency support mode that has been shifted to later, and is executed when the special game state flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 614a of the RAM 614.

<Special variation mode determination processing>
In the special variation mode determination process, it is first determined in step S1501 whether or not special variation display (special display effect) is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether a change command is received from main controller 162 (notification / production control device 610).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501 or a negative determination is made in step S1502, the special variation mode determination process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503, whether or not the change command is based on the entry into the right operation entry portion 63, that is, the entry into the right operation entry portion 63. It is determined whether or not the game time is based on. If a negative determination is made in step S1503, that is, if it is determined that the game is based on the entry into the lower operation entry portion 62, the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, a limited special variation display mode setting process is performed. Although details will be described later, a plurality of patterns are provided for special display effects executed during the special game state, but the outline is a series of videos selected by the level of special game state and lottery etc. Is displayed, and a device for smoothly displaying this moving image is provided. Specifically, the setting pattern is devised when the variable display period is set based on the hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering unit 63 so that the pattern of the period during which the special display effect is performed is smaller than the normal time. This makes it possible to smoothly display a moving image while suppressing an increase in control load.

  On the other hand, when the game times based on the entrance to the lower operation entrance section 62 are executed during the special game state, there are various patterns of the variable display period. Therefore, in such a case, it is difficult to display all the display end timings of the above-described moving images. Therefore, the display start timing of the moving image is delayed so that only a part of the moving image is displayed so that the moving image display ends at a clear timing in the middle portion of the moving image series. In this way, the special variation mode setting process is performed. Note that the special variation display in the present embodiment is characterized by being executed over a plurality of game times, but the function is on-hold information related to the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 as will be described later. Are provided on the premise that there are a plurality of the game balls, and when the game times proceed based on the hold information related to the lower action ball entry portion 62, the function is limited.

  In the first place, as already explained in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the hold information related to the right operation ball entry portion 63 is preferentially digested over the hold information related to the lower operation ball entry portion 62. Is set to That is, it means that there is no holding information related to at least the right operating ball entering portion 63 when the game times proceed based on the holding information related to the lower operating ball entering portion 62 as described above. In order to perform the above functions in the special gaming state well, it is important to secure the number of the hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 and to advance the game based on the hold information related to the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63 become. Therefore, when the above variable display mode is set, even if there are a plurality of pieces of hold information in the lower operation ball entry portion 62, these may be set as targets for one special variable display. Be regulated.

  In the subsequent step S1505, special fluctuation display command setting processing is performed based on the fluctuation display mode set in step S1504. This command is transmitted to the display control device 620, and the display control device 620 grasps what kind of special variation display should be performed based on the command.

  Returning to the description of step S1503, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, that is, if it is determined in step S1503 that the game is based on entering the right-hand actuated entry unit 63, the process proceeds to step S1506. . In step S1506, the number of holding information (holding number) related to the right-hand actuated entrance unit 63 is a specified number set in correspondence with the current special game state, specifically, a holding that can be a target of special variation display. It is determined whether or not the number of information is larger than the upper limit number.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1507. In step S1507, it is determined whether or not there is information corresponding to the jackpot result among the hold information to be subjected to the special fluctuation display this time. If a negative determination is made in step S1507, that is, if it is determined that there is no information corresponding to the jackpot result among the hold information that is the target of the special fluctuation display this time, the process proceeds to step S1508.

  In step S1508, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the outlier result is performed. Specifically, the variable display time is grasped for each hold information to be subjected to the special variable display, and the sum of the variable display times is set as the variable display time for the special variable display. After that, the special variation display mode is determined with reference to the table corresponding to the variation display time in the effect mode determination table for special variation display for outliers stored in the various table storage areas 613a of the ROM 613.

  After executing the processing of step S1508, the process proceeds to step S1505, and a special variation display command corresponding to the special variation display determined in step S1508 is set.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, that is, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to the jackpot result in the hold information that is the target of the current special variation display, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot result is performed. Specifically, the variable display time is grasped for each hold information to be subjected to the special variable display, and the sum of the variable display times is set as the variable display time for the special variable display.

  More specifically, it is intended to hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and in the setting of the variable display time, the hold information stored after the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is within the specified number. Is also forcibly removed from the target of special fluctuation display and the above-mentioned fluctuation display time is set. For example, when “3” is set as the prescribed number and the number of pieces of holding information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is three, if the second holding information corresponds to the jackpot result, Where three pieces of hold information can be the target of specific variation display, the target hold information is limited to the second. Thereafter, the special variation display mode is determined by referring to the effect mode determination table for special variation display for jackpot results stored in the various table storage areas 613a of the ROM 613 with reference to the table corresponding to the variation display time.

  Returning to the description of step S1506, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, that is, if the number of hold information relating to the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not there is information corresponding to the jackpot result among the hold information that is the target of the current special variation display. If a negative determination is made in step S1507, that is, if it is determined that there is no information corresponding to the jackpot result in the hold information that is the target of the current special variation display, the process proceeds to step S1511.

  In step S1511, the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the outlier result is performed. Specifically, the variable display time related to each hold information is grasped for all of the hold information related to the right-hand actuated entrance part 63, and the time obtained by adding the change display times is used as the variable display time for the special change display. Set. After that, the special variation display mode is determined with reference to the table corresponding to the variation display time in the effect mode determination table for special variation display for outliers stored in the various table storage areas 613a of the ROM 613. That is, when the number of the hold information does not reach the specified number, the special variation display is executed for all the hold information related to the existing right-hand actuated ball entering part 63. For example, when “3” is set as the specified number and the number of pieces of hold information related to the right operation ball entering portion 63 is two, these two pieces of hold information are targets for special variation display.

  After executing the process of step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the outlier result is performed. Specifically, the variable display time is grasped for each hold information to be subjected to the special variable display, and the sum of the variable display times is set as the variable display time for the special variable display. After that, the special variation display mode is determined with reference to the table corresponding to the variation display time in the effect mode determination table for special variation display for outliers stored in the various table storage areas 613a of the ROM 613.

  Returning to the description of step S1510, if a negative determination is made in step S1510, that is, if it is determined that there is a corresponding to the jackpot result in the hold information that is the target of the current special variation display. The process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot result is performed. Specifically, the variable display time is grasped for each hold information to be subjected to the special variable display, and the sum of the variable display times is set as the variable display time for the special variable display.

  More specifically, it is intended to hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and in the above variable display time setting, the hold information stored after the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is forcibly changed from the target of special variable display. And change the display time. For example, when “4” is set as the prescribed number and the number of pieces of holding information related to the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is three, if the second holding information corresponds to the jackpot result, Where three pieces of hold information can be the target of specific variation display, the target hold information is limited to the second. Thereafter, the special variation display mode is determined by referring to the effect mode determination table for special variation display for jackpot results stored in the various table storage areas 613a of the ROM 613 with reference to the table corresponding to the variation display time.

  After executing the processing of step S1511 or step S1512, the process proceeds to step S1505, and a special variation display command corresponding to the special variation display determined in each of steps S1511 and S1512 is set.

  Next, display control processing during a special game state executed by the MPU 622 of the display control device 620 based on commands from the main control device 162 and the notification / production control device 610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display control process is a process executed as part of a normal process periodically executed by the MPU 622.

<Display control processing in special gaming state>
In the display control process, it is first determined in step S1601 whether or not a change command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, based on the received variation command, a process of starting symbol variation display in the second variation display area ME2 is executed. Thereby, in the second variation display area ME2, the simplified symbol starts scrolling in the vertical direction. Note that the variation display mode in the second variation display area ME2 is determined with reference to the variation display mode determination table for special variation display stored in the various table storage areas 623a of the ROM 623.

  After executing the process of step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603 to determine whether or not a special variation command is received from the notification / production control device. If it is determined in step S1603 that the special variation command has not been received, for example, if the special display effect is being executed in the first variation display area ME1, the display control process is terminated. To do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604, and the display control process for the first variable display area ME1 is executed. Specifically, an image display process for displaying a moving image (animation image) stored in the display control device 620 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1605, after the transition to the special gaming state, the number of times that the special variation display has been executed, specifically, the number of times that the special display effect has been executed in the first variation display area ME1 has been set in advance. In the embodiment, it is determined whether it has reached 20 times). More specifically, the various counter areas 624b of the RAM 624 are provided with a game number counter GC2 for storing the number of times that the special display effect is executed after shifting to the special game state, and the value of the game number counter GC2 is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not it exceeds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1605, the remaining number of times displayed in the number-of-times display area CE is changed to a state in which 1 is subtracted. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1607, and the display switching process of the number-of-times display area CE is executed. Specifically, for example, “WARNING!” Is displayed as a message indicating that there is a high possibility that the special gaming state will end soon or that the special gaming state is extended.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the value of the game number counter GC2 exceeds the number set as the upper limit (upper limit number “20”). As for the upper limit, the number of game times that can benefit from the high frequency support mode is divided by the number of hold information (game times) that is the target when the above special variation display (special display effect) is executed. Although it is a number, the special variation display for each time is not always executed in a situation where a sufficient number of hold information is stored. Further, the special game state is continued until it falls from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game times consumed during that time is determined. In view of these reasons, the following events occur. In other words, for example, even if a state where special variation display is performed over the game times corresponding to each piece of hold information with three consecutive pieces of hold information as an upper limit, the special information is provided under the condition that the number of pieces of hold information is less than three. If the variable display is to be started, there is inevitably a difference between the number displayed in the number display area CE and the number of times the special variable display is actually executed in the special game state. The processing in steps S1605 to S1607 is a device for suppressing the occurrence of such a sense of incongruity due to the deviation.

  Returning to the description of step S1601, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if it is determined that a change command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined whether a change end command is received from main controller 162 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1608, the display control process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the process advances to step S1609 to execute the process of ending the variable display in the second variable display area ME2. Thereby, the symbol combination corresponding to the game times is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the outline of the special variation display executed in the special game state will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the special variation display executed over two pieces of holding information (game times). The special variation display is shown in FIG. 28 (a) → FIG. 28 (b) → FIG. c) Proceed in the order of FIG. 28 (d).

  Immediately after shifting to the special game state, the display pattern on the display screen 75a is changed from the one corresponding to the normal game state to the one corresponding to the special game state as already described. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 28A, the remaining number of times that the special variation display executed in the special game state is executed in the number display area CE provided at the upper left of the display screen 75a (provisional number) ) Is displayed. In addition, a girl character is displayed in the variable display area ME1.

  In the special game state, a moving image is displayed so that the girl performs a specific action. For example, the fact that a bonanza is won is notified by catching a fairy in a series of display effects. When the special variation display is started, the girl starts a specific action, and the symbol scroll display is started in the second variation display area ME2 provided at the lower right of the display screen 75a in synchronization with the action.

  After the moving image display is started in the first variation display area ME1 and the variation display of the symbol is started in the second variation display area ME2, it is moved to the second variation display area ME2 at the timing when one game round is finished. The symbol combination corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed. During this time, the video display of the character is continued in the first variation display area ME1, and a wrinkle is displayed on the right side of the screen.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (b) → FIG. 28 (c), the scroll display of the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2 is resumed. Switch to a video that glides across (step up).

  In the special variation display illustrated in FIG. 28, the second hold information (game times) that is the target of the special variation display corresponds to the jackpot result. Therefore, finally, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), an image in which a girl catches a fairy is displayed in the first variation display area ME1, and a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed in the second variation display area ME2. Will be stopped and a notice of winning the jackpot in accordance with the special fluctuation display will be announced. As a result, since the special variation display is performed once, the number of games displayed in the number display area CE is decremented by 1, and “19” is displayed.

  In the special variation display described in detail above, a moving image is displayed. This main moving image for special variation display is stored in the ROM 623 of the display control device 620 in correspondence with various variation display times. Here, in view of the fact that the special variation display is executed over a plurality of game times, there are various variations in the period during which the special variation display is executed, and it is possible to store a video corresponding to each pattern. For example, the required storage capacity becomes enormous. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of such circumstances and the like, the variation display time of each game time under the special gaming state is roughly divided into two. Thereby, even in the configuration in which the special variation display is performed over a plurality of game times, it is possible to suppress a variety of periods during which the special variation display is performed. Hereinafter, the configuration adopted to realize the function will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Setting process in special gaming state>
In the MPU 602 of the main controller 162, it is determined whether or not it is in a special gaming state by the above-described variable display time setting process (see FIG. 18). The process proceeds to the setting process corresponding to the special game state in S702. In this special setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the game number counter GC3 corresponds to “1” or “a number obtained by adding 1 to a multiple of the specified number”. The game number counter GC3 is stored in various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604, and is cleared to 0 at the time of transition to the special game state, and thereafter functions as a means for counting the number of game times executed during the special game state. To do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the first variation display time T1 is set as the variation display time related to the hold information regardless of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, the second variation display time T2 is set as the variation display time related to the hold information regardless of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. To do. That is, in the special game state, either the first variation display time T1 or the second variation display time T2 is selected at a constant cycle.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 29B, the first fluctuation display time T1 is set longer than the second fluctuation display time T2. More specifically, the first variation display time T1 is 12 seconds, the second variation display time T2 is 0.6 seconds, and the symbol stop display time corresponding to the result of the deviation is set to 0.2 seconds. Yes. Thereby, even if it is a case where a special display effect is performed over several game times, it is suppressing that the period which performs the said special display effect becomes various.

In this embodiment, as described above, the first special game state to the third special game state are set as the special game state. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the difference between these special game states.
First special game state (corresponding to 4R normal jackpot result B): a game state in which special variation display (special display effect) is set to be executable over a maximum of two game times, and the prescribed number = “ 2 ”, the number of times of support in the high frequency support mode =“ 40 ”.
Second special game state (corresponding to 4R normal jackpot result C): a game state in which special variation display (special display effect) is set to be executable over a maximum of three game times, and the prescribed number = “ 3 ”, the number of times of support in the high frequency support mode =“ 60 ”.
Third special game state (corresponding to 4R normal jackpot result D): a game state in which special variation display (special display effect) is set to be executable over a maximum of four game times, and the prescribed number = “ 4 ”, the support count in the high frequency support mode =“ 80 ”.

  In any of these special game states, the values of the first variation display time T1 and the second variation display time T2 are the same.

  The ratio of the first fluctuation display time T1 to the special fluctuation display time in which the special fluctuation display is executed is dominant as compared with the second fluctuation display time T2 and the stop display time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), in the first special gaming state, for example, when the special variation display is executed over two game times, the special variation display time is “13.0 sec. When the special variation display is executed in one game time, the special variation display time is “12.2 sec”.

  In the second special game state, for example, when the special fluctuation display is executed over three game times, the special fluctuation display time is “13.8 sec”, and the special fluctuation display is executed over two game times. In this case, the special variation display time is “13.0 sec”, and when the special variation display is executed in one game time, the special variation display time is “12.2 sec”.

  In the third special game state, for example, when the special fluctuation display is executed over four game times, the special fluctuation display time is “14.6 sec”, and the special fluctuation display is executed over the three game times. In this case, the special variation display time is “13.8 sec”, and when the special variation display is executed over two game times, the special variation display time is “13.0 sec”. When the special fluctuation display is executed at, the special fluctuation display time is “12.2 sec”.

  As described above, in any special game state, by controlling the first variation display time T1, special variation display is executed over a number of game times for the player watching the display screen 75a. It has been devised to make it difficult to distinguish between them.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 29C, the flow of the game progress in each special game state will be exemplified. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, execution of one special variation display on the display screen 75a is referred to as “display times”.

  For example, in the first special game state, the special variation display is executed over a maximum of two game times. In this case, the first game time starts / ends → result stop display → the second game time starts / ends → result stop display during one display time, and two games are simulated. The times are combined into one display time. And by repeating that the result of two game times is displayed at the end of one display time, the jackpot winning expectation for each display time is increased about twice as compared with the normal time. .

  In the second special game state, the special variation display is executed over a maximum of three game times. In this case, the first game time starts / ends during the first display time → result stop display → second game time starts / ends → result stop display → third game time starts / ends → result The stop display is made, and three game times are grouped into one display time in a pseudo manner. And by repeating that the results of three game times are displayed at the end of one display time, the jackpot winning expectation for each display time is increased about three times compared to the normal time. .

  In the third special game state, the special variation display is executed over a maximum of four game times. In this case, the first game time starts / ends during the first display time → result stop display → second game time starts / ends → result stop display → third game time starts / ends → result Stop display → Start / end of the fourth game time → Stop display of the result, and four game times are grouped into one display time in a pseudo manner. And by repeating the display of the results of the four game times at the end of one display time, the jackpot winning expectation for each display time is increased about four times compared to the normal time. .

  That is, according to the special game state, a pseudo high probability zone with a limited number of times is realized. By having such a configuration, the gaming state is diversified and the monotony of the game is suppressed. Hereinafter, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 30, the flow of the game in the present embodiment based on the existence of the above-described pseudo high probability zone will be described. In FIG. 30, for the sake of convenience, the low frequency support mode is “low frequency”, the high frequency support mode is “high frequency”, the low probability mode is “low probability”, the high probability mode is “high probability”, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result. "4R probability change", 8R probability change jackpot result "8R probability change", 4R normal jackpot result A "4R normal A", 4R normal jackpot result B "4R normal B", 4R normal jackpot result C "4R normal C" 4R normal jackpot result D is simply displayed as “4R normal D” and 8R normal jackpot result is “8R normal”.

  It should be noted that the player is taught using video, BGM, or the like that the player is in the first special game state to the third special game state described above and is in a game state advantageous to the player. For example, on the display screen, a message of “yellow <green <red” is displayed to show the player the superiority or inferiority of the background image corresponding to each special gaming state.

<Game flow>
As shown in FIG. 30 in a simplified manner, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the 4R probability variable jackpot result, the 8R probability variable jackpot result, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 8R normal jackpot result are obtained. In this case, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. In the special game state, the variable pitching device 65 is opened, and a large amount of game balls can be acquired by launching the game balls toward the right route.

  After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to one of two different game states depending on the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 4R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R probability variation jackpot result is completed, the state shifts to a high probability gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. This high probability gaming state will continue until the next jackpot result is won. In other words, the high-probability gaming state remains until the jackpot result is reached, so there is virtually no limit on the number of high-probability gaming states.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 4R normal jackpot result A or the 8R normal jackpot result ends, the chance mode (chance game state or pullback) corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is limited. (Game state). About this chance mode, although the number of game times that can benefit from the high frequency support mode is 100 times, at least it is set to be a game state advantageous to the player compared with the normal game state Has been. Specifically, not only the possibility that the game ball enters the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is increased, but if the player wins a big win in such a state, the game ball must be switched to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. To do. For these two reasons, the chance mode can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  When any of the 4R normal jackpot result B to the 4R normal jackpot result D is obtained in the normal gaming state, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode (special gaming state) corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode. The execution period of this special game state is set to be extremely short as compared with the special game state corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and the substantial required time is about 30 seconds including opening to ending. In addition, since the opening / closing operation of the variable pitching device 65 is executed in an extremely short time, the possibility that a game ball enters is low. For these reasons, the possibility that the player is recognized to have shifted to the special gaming state is reduced.

  As already described, after the end of the special gaming state, the state shifts to a special gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The special gaming state is a pseudo high probability zone / pseudo high probability gaming state with a limited number of times set so as to increase the possibility of winning the jackpot in a pseudo manner. Therefore, in the special game state corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode described above, a moving image for a warning is displayed as an effect suggesting the transition to the pseudo high probability zone. That is, the special game state functions as a precursor game state that suggests the transition to the pseudo high probability zone.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the special gaming state (pseudo high probability zone). As described above, in the special game state, the first special game state (first pseudo high probability zone) that shifts with the 4R normal jackpot result B as the trigger, and the second special game that shifts with the 4R normal jackpot result C as the trigger A state (second pseudo high probability zone) and a third special gaming state that is shifted with the 4R normal jackpot result D as an opportunity are set. In each of these special game states, the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are internally supported, and the internal jackpot winning probability is the same as in the above-mentioned chance mode, but a plurality of game times are simulated. In other words, the winning probability in one display time (the special variation display / special display effect) executed on the display screen 75a is increased.

  In the first special game state, one display time is executed over the game times up to two, and the number of game times that can benefit from the high frequency support mode is 40 times. . As a result, a high probability zone limited to 20 times + α is realized. In this high-probability zone, the winning probability at one display time increases to about twice that of normal times.

  In the second special game state, one display time is executed over 3 game times, and the number of game times that can benefit from the high frequency support mode is 60 times. . As a result, a high probability zone limited to 20 times + α is realized. In this high-probability zone, the winning probability at one display time increases to about three times the normal time.

  In the third special game state, 1 display time is executed over 4 game times, and the number of game times that can benefit from the high frequency support mode is 80 times. . As a result, a high probability zone limited to 20 times + α is realized. In this high-probability zone, the winning probability at one display time rises to about four times the normal time.

  In the case of transition to the special game state, as described above, the display mode of the display screen 75a is switched to that corresponding to the special game state, and it is indicated that the display has shifted to a pseudo high probability state limited to 20 + α. . Here, the background image displayed on the display screen 75a changes to yellow during the first special gaming state, green during the second special gaming state, and red during the third special gaming state, and is advantageous in the pseudo high probability zone. A degree will be suggested.

  During the special game state, the game ball is mainly launched to the right route, and the game proceeds based on the hold information related to the right operation ball entry unit 63. In the present embodiment, by providing the guide passage 64 between the through gate 66 and the right working ball entering portion 63, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 66 always reaches the right working ball entering portion 63. It has been devised. As a result, the hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 remains at the upper limit during the high-frequency support mode. This suppresses the above-described pseudo high probability mode from failing to function properly. In addition, when winning a big hit by entering the right-hand actuated entry portion 63, it always shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, so that it is avoided that the big hits that do not have any outgoing balls are continuous. Is done. Then, when the result of the 8R probability variation jackpot result is obtained by entering the right-hand actuated entry unit 63, the real high probability mode (high probability game state) described above is entered. In the high probability mode, the possibility of winning a big win in one game time (one display time) is set higher than in any of the special game states described above, so that the promotion of the high probability mode has occurred. Can give the player a good impression.

  If the display mode of the display screen 75a in the high-probability gaming state is shared with the special gaming state, it is possible to increase the relevance between the special gaming state and the high-probability gaming state. In this case, for example, in a high-probability gaming state, the background image may be red and “∞” may be displayed in the number-of-times display area CE. Furthermore, if the display mode of the count display area CE is a countdown type as in the special game state, and “∞” is displayed after “0” is displayed, “∞” is displayed in the third special game state. It can be expected to be promoted to, and can contribute to further enhancement of interest.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the state where the electric accessory 71 is switched to the high-frequency support mode, the pitch occurrence frequency is high, and thus the number of pieces of hold information related to the right action ball entering portion 63 is easily secured to some extent. In general gaming machine specifications, in such a situation, a so-called time-saving function acts to digest the hold information one after another. In this case, for example, on the display screen, predetermined symbol combinations such as numbers are stopped and displayed one after another, and the display mode of the display screen is also monotonous as described above due to the mechanical information being digested. It is easy to become.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is entered, special display effects are executed over a plurality of game times on the display screen 75a. Thereby, the period for performing a series of special display effects can be secured, and various variations can be imparted to the special display effects. Therefore, even if it is a case where the time saving function mentioned above is exhibited, it can suppress that a display mode becomes monotonous.

  Further, during the high frequency support mode, a special display effect is executed over a plurality of game times. This causes a difference between the actual number of game times being executed and the number of pseudo game times (pseudo game times or display times) displayed on the display screen 75a. In other words, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is granted at one display time during the high frequency support mode (during special display effects) without changing the winning probability in one game time substantially. The probability of winning the determination can be changed (increased) in a pseudo manner. For example, in the special display effect that is executed over two game times, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about twice that of a normal game, and the special display effect that is executed over three game times. In, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game in the high frequency support mode, and to contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, regarding the display screen 75a on which the special display effect is executed and the main display portion D (the display portion DL for operating action portion DL, DR) on which the variable display for each game is executed, the former is made larger than the latter. The former is arranged at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine (game area PE) than the latter. Thereby, the various effects mentioned above can be exhibited more suitably.

  In the pachinko machine 10, it is one of the pleasures to follow the movement of the game ball with eyes, and the flow path of the game ball in the game area PE is diversified by the nail 69 or the like. For this reason, during the low-frequency winning mode (when a game ball is being fired to the left route), the occurrence frequency of the balls entering the action balls 62 and 63 is likely to be biased, and a plurality of pieces of hold information can be stably stored. It becomes difficult to be in the state of being. Furthermore, the execution of the special display effect for a plurality of pieces of hold information in such a situation causes the player to feel as if the hold information has disappeared, and the above-described pseudo high performance. The mechanism of generating the probability state becomes a factor that is grasped by the player. In this case, there is a concern that the above-described functions will not be performed well.

  On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, compared to the low frequency support mode, the frequency of entering the right working ball entering portion 63 is increased, and it is easy to maintain a state in which a certain number of pieces of holding information are stored. Therefore, a special display effect is performed under such circumstances, and it is preferable that the special display effect is not performed during the low-frequency winning mode in which it is difficult for a ball to enter, in order to suitably exhibit the above functions. There is a technical significance.

  The special display effect is started based on the start of the first game time among a plurality of consecutive game times, and is ended based on the end of the last game time. Thereby, the relationship between the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 and the display part DL and DR for the operation entrance part of the main display part D can be suitably maintained.

  In the configuration in which the result of the grant determination relating to a plurality of game times is indicated by one special display effect (display time), the winning result may be higher when the number of pieces of hold information (game times) that are the targets of the special display effect is larger. Increases nature. In other words, a special game state is established as if the probability of winning results is increased without changing the winning probability for each game time by increasing the number of pending information to be digested in a batch. . Therefore, further diversification of games can be realized, and the effect of improving attention to games can be suitably exhibited.

  When shifting to the special game state, as the number of target game times increases, the winning probability can be increased in a pseudo manner as described above. However, as a matter of course, in such a configuration, the apparent digestion speed increases as the number of target game times increases. For this reason, when the first special gaming state to the third special gaming state are compared, it may be ambiguous which is substantially advantageous.

  In this regard, according to the present embodiment, when the number of game times to be subjected to special display effects (the number of game times to be grouped in a pseudo manner) is large, the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode is increased. When the number of game times is small, the number of times of support in the high frequency support mode is also reduced. Thereby, the difference of the substantial advantage and disadvantage of each special game state can be clarified, and generation | occurrence | production of the said disadvantage can be avoided suitably.

  In particular, the number obtained by dividing the support number (“40”) related to the first special gaming state by the prescribed number (“2”) in the first special gaming state, and the prescribed number (“3” in the second special gaming state). )) Divided by the number of support times ("60") related to the second special gaming state, and the number obtained by dividing the number of support times ("80") by the specified number ("4") in the third special gaming state. Therefore, a pseudo high probability winning zone with a limited number of times can be realized without changing the winning probability. In this way, it becomes possible to give a function as a stepwise high probability zone to a game in the high frequency support mode, which can contribute to diversification of the game.

  Even in a gaming machine that performs a special display effect during the high-frequency support mode (a pseudo high-probability gaming state), it is difficult to completely eliminate unevenness in the number of stored pieces of pending information. That is, when the special display effect is executed in the special gaming state, the hold information that is appropriate for the special display effect is not always secured. Therefore, when the number of stored hold information reaches the specified number, the special effect display is executed over the game times corresponding to the same number of hold information as the specified number, and the stored hold information When the number does not reach the specified number, the special display effect is executed over the game times corresponding to all stored hold information (hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering section 63), thereby Thus, it is possible to suitably prevent the function of realizing the pseudo high probability state from being performed well.

  If a big win is won in the process of repeated special display effects, and if the special display effects are forcibly performed, including the later game times, the player may suffer unexpected disadvantages. Arise. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suppressed by using the above-described hold information prefetching function in combination to grasp the presence / absence of the winning result in advance and restricting the hold information that is the target of the special display effect.

  When the game is diversified by realizing a plurality of pseudo high probability states, if the player knows how many pieces of pending information are displayed for a specific effect The mechanism of the pseudo high probability state will be understood. In this case, there is a concern that the various effects described above cannot be exhibited well. It is assumed that the player's attention is mainly directed to the display screen 75a. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience is suppressed by hiding the hold ball on the display screen 75a and leaving the display of the number of hold information on the main display portion D provided at a location different from the display screen 75a. can do.

  When performing a special display effect over a plurality of game times, the time for the special display effect varies because the time for each game time is accumulated. Such diversification of time is not preferable because it causes a control load related to the special display effect to increase. Therefore, in the special game state, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be avoided by selecting one of two types of display time, long and short, and setting the variable display time for each game.

  Further, two types of variable display times are used, a long first variable display time T1 is selected for one hold information among a plurality of continuous hold information, and a short second change display is used for other hold information. By selecting the time T2, it is possible to suppress giving the player an impression as if the special display effect is extended and the game progress is unduly delayed.

  And by setting it as the structure by which the 1st display time T1 set comparatively long is included in one of the predetermined number of special information, newly hold information is added during the special display effect being performed. The possibility of memorizing can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the function of setting the above-described pseudo high probability state from being performed well by suppressing the shift to the next display time without securing a predetermined number of pieces of reserved information.

  In the configuration in which the first variation display time T1 / second variation display time T2 is selected, the special display effects can be executed at a high tempo by periodically allocating the variation display times T1 and T2. Thus, it is possible to suitably suppress the special display effect from becoming excessively long or excessively short.

<Second Embodiment>
In the pachinko machine 10, it is one of the pleasures to follow the movement of the game ball in the first place, and the flow path of the game ball in the game area PE is diversified by the nail 69 or the like. For this reason, even in the high-frequency support mode, the occurrence frequency of entering the right-hand actuating entry unit 63 may be biased. Therefore, it is assumed that it may be difficult to stably store a preset number of special information. In particular, for each special game state shown in the first embodiment, as the set number increases, there is a possibility that it is more susceptible to the above-described bias.

  The present embodiment has been made in view of such a situation, and has one feature that is devised to make it less susceptible to the above-described bias. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the number of hold information stored at the start timing of the special fluctuation display (display time) is referred to, and the hold that is the target of the special fluctuation display based on the reference result Although the configuration is such that the information is confirmed, in the present embodiment, the above-described inconvenience is caused by delaying the confirmation timing from the start timing of the special variation display by a simple configuration in which the confirmation timing is different. It is suppressed.

  Here, a configuration for delaying the above-described determination timing will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the following description, explanations are provided for various configurations that are common to the first embodiment, and differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the manner of determining the variable display time for each game time executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 is different from that of the first embodiment. First, the special time setting preparation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special time setting preparation process is a process executed as part of the normal process (FIG. 15).

<Special time setting preparation process>
In the special time setting preparation process, preparation is made for determining which hold information to apply to which of the first variation display time T1 and the second variation display time T2. Specifically, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in more detail whether or not it is the timing to end the opening / closing execution mode and shift to the special game state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, processing proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, an opportunity flag is set in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. When the variable display time setting process is performed in the game times control process (FIG. 16), the first variable display time T1 is set based on the fact that this trigger flag is set. In other words, when the opportunity flag is not set in the special gaming state, the second variation display time T2 is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, it is determined whether or not it is the game turn start timing corresponding to the first variation display time T1. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the process advances to step S1804, and the value of the confirmation timer counter CC provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604 is cleared to “0”. The value of the confirmation timer counter CC is incremented by 1 every time the normal process is executed. Based on the value of the confirmation timer counter CC, which of the variable display times T1 / T2 is selected at the start of each game time is influenced.

  In the subsequent step S1805, the value of the holding number counter MC provided in the various counter areas 604d of the RAM 604 is cleared to “0”. The value of the number-of-holds counter MC is determined based on the hold information (specifically, the hold information related to the right-hand side actuated entrance part 63) in the winning process for the actuated entrance part (see FIG. 12) executed as part of the timer interrupt process. Every time it is stored, it is updated ("1" is added). Based on the value of the number-of-holds counter MC, which of the variable display times T1 / T2 is selected at the start of each game time is influenced.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the value of the holding number counter MC has reached a specified number corresponding to the current special gaming state. If a positive determination is made in step S1806. That is, when the value of the hold number counter MC is a specified number, the process proceeds to the process for reaching the specified number in steps S1807 and S1808.

  In step S1807, an opportunity flag is set in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. In the subsequent step S1807, the value of the hold number counter MC is cleared to “0”. The pending number counter MC is validated (updated) with the transition to the special gaming state, and invalidated (not updated) when in another gaming state.

  Returning to the description of step S1806, even if a negative determination is made in step S1806, the processing of steps S1807 and S1808 described above is executed if other conditions are satisfied. Specifically, as shown in step S1809, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation timer counter CC is a predetermined value. This predetermined value is set to be shorter than the first fluctuation display time (12 sec) (6 sec in the present embodiment), and the game times (holding) to be included in the special fluctuation display will be described in detail later. This corresponds to the timing for confirming (information). In the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, whether or not the above confirmation timing has been reached by comparing the value of the confirmation timer counter CC with a predetermined value instead of the signal from the control device on the sub side such as the notification / production control device 610 or the like. Determine whether or not.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32, the setting process corresponding to the special gaming state in the variable display time setting process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Setting process for special gaming state>
In the setting process corresponding to the special game state, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is a timing to shift to the special game state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, processing proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the above-described trigger flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903, and a variable display time resetting process is performed. Specifically, when the hold information is stored when the opening / closing execution mode ends and the state shifts to the special game state, the variable display time provisionally determined in the above-described processing related to the above-described prior specification is invalidated. Then, a process for newly setting the variable display time is performed. Although detailed description is omitted, the fact that such a change has been made is transmitted to the notification / production control device 610 or the like by a command.

  By the processes in steps S1901 to S1903, the first variation display time T1 set relatively long is applied to the first game time after the transition to the special game state. After executing the process of step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904, the trigger flag erasing process is executed, and the setting process corresponding to the special gaming state is finished as it is.

  Returning to the description of step S1901, if a negative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing for shifting to the special gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation timer counter CC is smaller than the predetermined value. That is, it is determined whether or not the confirmation timing described above has been reached.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1905, that is, if it is determined that the confirmation timing has not been reached, the processing proceeds to step S1906 and subsequent steps. However, the predetermined value shown in the present embodiment is set so that the above-described confirmation timing is reached during the game round in which the value of the confirmation timer counter CC is cleared to “0”. For this reason, in the game times in which the first variation display time is set as the special variation display time, the variation display is not started again under the situation where the value of the confirmation timer counter CC has not reached the predetermined value. . That is, game times do not overlap. Therefore, the processes in steps S1906 to S1910 are basically omitted.

<Supplementary explanation of the configuration that can handle deformation patterns>
Here, the predetermined value can be arbitrarily changed. For this reason, as shown in a modification example to be described later, in a situation where it is known in advance that the special variation display can be performed across a plurality of game times, the confirmation timing is the special variation display. In some cases, the game is set to be reached during the subsequent game times instead of the game times that have started. In this case, each process of step S1906 to step S1910 is executed.

  Specifically, in step S1906, it is determined whether or not the number of holds exceeds a specified number. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907 to determine whether or not the hold information is a trigger for starting the next special variation display. The determination processing in step S1906 and step S1907 is actually processing executed based on whether or not the trigger flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If the trigger flag is stored, the step is performed. An affirmative determination is made in both processes of S1906 and S1907, and the process proceeds to step S1908. After the first variation display time T1 is set as the variation display time in step S1908, the trigger flag stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604 is erased in step S1909, and the setting process corresponding to this special gaming state Exit.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in either step S1906 or step S1907, that is, if the trigger flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1910. After the second variation display time T2 is set as the variation display time in step S1910, the setting process corresponding to the special gaming state is terminated as it is.

  Returning to the description of step S1905, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1905, that is, if it is determined that the value of the confirmation timer counter CC is greater than the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, it is determined whether or not an opportunity flag is stored in various flag storage areas 604e of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, the first fluctuation display time T1 is set as the fluctuation display time in the subsequent step S1912. Thereafter, in step S1913, the opportunity flag is deleted, and the setting process corresponding to the special gaming state is ended as it is.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, when a negative determination is made in step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1907, and various processes are performed to determine which of the first variation display time T1 / second variation display time T2 is applied. However, in the present embodiment, which one is set as the variable display time is defined in the special time setting preparation process. Therefore, in actuality, if a negative determination is made in step S1911, after setting the second variable display time T2 in the variable display time in step S1910, the setting process corresponding to this special gaming state is terminated as it is. It becomes.

  Here, as shown in the above-described modification, when the predetermined value is changed, a negative determination is made in step S1911 to apply any of the first variation display time T1 / second variation display time T2. Various processes are performed.

  As described above in detail, for main controller 162 in the present embodiment, predetermined value = invariable value (individual value) is used to uniquely define the confirmation timing, but the predetermined value is variable. Even so, it is configured to allow this.

  Next, a special variation display mode determination process (hereinafter referred to as a special variation mode determination process) executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special variation mode determination process is a process performed as part of a normal process periodically executed by the MPU 612.

  In the special variation mode determination process, first, it is determined in step S2001 whether or not special variation display is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not a change command that triggers special change display has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the special variation mode determination process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result is supported with reference to the variation command and the type command. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, special setting display mode temporary setting processing is executed. In the temporary setting process, first, it is confirmed whether the gaming state is the first special gaming state to the third special gaming state, and the special variation display mode is provisionally set by lottery based on the confirmation result.

  Specifically, in the case of the first special game state, a series of special variation display modes executed across two game times (holding information) are provisionally determined by lottery, and the second special game state In this case, a series of special variation display modes executed over three game times (holding information) is provisionally determined by lottery, and in the case of the third special game state, the three game times (holding information) are straddled. A series of special variation display modes to be executed are provisionally determined by lottery. In other words, when a change command that triggers special change display is received, the hold information is secured as the special change display mode regardless of the number of hold information stored at that timing. Temporary setting is performed on the assumption.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, restricted special variation display confirmation processing is executed. When the game times that trigger the special variation display correspond to the jackpot result, even if there is subsequent hold information, the game times corresponding to the special variation display is limited to 1. Become. Therefore, not the temporary setting as described above, but the special variation display mode determination process is performed.

  After executing the process of step S2004 or step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006. After executing the special fluctuation display command setting process, the special fluctuation mode determining process is terminated. The MPU 622 of the display control device 620 identifies which type of special variation display is performed by receiving the special variation display command.

  Returning to the description of step S2001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if it is determined that special variation display is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the above-described confirmation timing has been reached (specifically, whether or not 6 seconds have elapsed since the start of special variation display). If a negative determination is made in step S2007, the special variation display mode determination process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, the special variation mode determination process in step S2008 is executed to finalize the temporarily set special variation display mode, and then the special variation mode determination process ends. To do.

<Special effect mode confirmation processing>
Here, the special effect mode determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special effect mode determination process, first, in step S2101, a determination process for holding information (game times) to be subjected to special variation display is executed. Specifically, referring to the number of hold information (specifically, hold information on the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63) stored at the confirmation timing, and when the number of the hold information is equal to or more than the prescribed number, When the number of the hold information is smaller than the specified number, the special change display is executed over the stored hold information so that the special change display is executed over the same number of hold information as the specified number. As a result, the target hold information (game times) is determined.

  In the subsequent step S2102, it is determined based on the previously specified information whether or not there is information corresponding to the jackpot result among the hold information determined in step S2101. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the determined number of hold information (hold number) has reached a specified number.

  If it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S2104 to perform special variation display continuation processing. Thereby, it is determined that the special variation display mode temporarily set in step S2004 is continued as it is. Thereafter, the special variation display mode continuation command setting process is executed in step S2105, and then the special effect confirmation process is terminated. The special variation display continuation command set in step S2105 is transmitted to the display control device 620, and the display control device 620 receives this special variation display continuation command to continue the temporarily set special variation display mode. To understand that it has been confirmed.

  Returning to the description of step S2103, if a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if it is determined that the determined number of hold information (hold number) has not reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2106. The first change process of the variable display mode is executed. As described above, the temporarily set special variation display mode is set on the premise that the number of the hold information reaches the specified number. For this reason, when the number of the hold information is less than the specified number, it is necessary to change the special variation display mode. Therefore, in the first change process, based on the determined number of hold information, the temporarily set special variation display mode is changed to correspond to the number of the hold information.

  After that, after executing the special variation display mode first change command setting process in step S2107, the special effect confirmation process is terminated. The special variation display mode first change command set in step S2107 is transmitted to the display control device 620, and the display control device 620 receives the first change command to change the temporarily set special variation display mode. Know what to do and how it changes.

  As illustrated in FIG. 28, the special fluctuation display is a series of animations displayed on the display screen 75a (specifically, the first fluctuation display area ME1). A branch that branches depending on whether there is a hit result or not is provided. In the first change process, the length of the special variation display (display times) is changed by replacing the animation display after the branch. It will be.

  Returning to the description of step S2102, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to the jackpot result in the hold information determined in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2108. The special variation display mode temporarily set in step S2107 is premised on the fact that the number of pieces of hold information reaches a specified number, and that there is no corresponding hold result among the pieces of hold information. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, at least the latter of these two preconditions is not supported. Therefore, in step S2108, the provisionally set special variation display mode is changed in accordance with the one corresponding to the winning result and the number of target hold information limited to that corresponding to the winning result. Processing (second change processing of special variation display mode) is executed.

  After that, after executing the special variation display mode second change command setting process in step S2109, the special effect confirmation process is terminated. The special change display mode second change command set in step S2108 is transmitted to the display control device 620, and the display control device 620 receives the second change command to change the temporarily set special change display mode. Know what to do and how it changes.

  As described above, the special variation display is a series of animations displayed on the display screen 75a (specifically, the first variation display area ME1). In the first change process, the length of the special variation display (display times) and its final display result are changed by replacing the animation display after the branch in the first change process. It will be.

  Next, display control processing in a special game state executed by the MPU 622 of the display control device 620 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Display control processing in special gaming state>
In the display control process, it is first determined in step S2201 whether or not a change command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202.

  In step S2202, the process of starting the symbol variation display in the second variation display area ME2 is executed based on the received variation command. Thereby, in the second variable display area ME2, the simplified symbol starts scrolling in the vertical direction. Note that the variation display mode in the second variation display area ME2 is determined with reference to the variation display mode determination table for special variation display stored in the various table storage areas 623a of the ROM 623.

  After executing the process of step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether a special variation display command is received from the notification / production control device. If it is determined in step S2203 that the special variation display command has not been received, for example, when the special variation display (special display effect) is being performed in the first variation display area ME1, the state is unchanged. The display control process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute a display control process for the first variable display area ME1. Specifically, an image display process for displaying a moving image (animation image) stored in the display control device 620 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S2205, after the transition to the special gaming state, the number of times that the special variation display has been executed, specifically, the number of times that the special variation display has been executed in the first variation display area ME1 is set to the upper limit number (this In the embodiment, it is determined whether it has reached 20 times). More specifically, the various counter areas 624b of the RAM 624 are provided with a game number counter GC2 for storing the number of times the special variation display is executed after shifting to the special game state, and the value of the game number counter GC2 is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not it exceeds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the remaining number of times displayed in the number-of-times display area CE is changed to a state in which 1 is subtracted. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2207 to execute display switching processing of the number-of-times display area CE. Specifically, for example, “WARNING!” Is displayed as a message indicating that there is a high possibility that the special gaming state will end soon or that the special gaming state is extended.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the value of the game number counter GC2 exceeds the number set as the upper limit (upper limit number “20”). As for the upper limit, the number of game times that can benefit from the high frequency support mode is divided by the number of hold information (game times) that is the target when the above special variation display (special display effect) is executed. Although it is a number, the special variation display for each time is not always executed in a situation where a sufficient number of hold information is stored. Further, the special game state is continued until it falls from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game times consumed during that time is determined. In view of these reasons, the following events occur. In other words, for example, even if a state where special variation display is performed over the game times corresponding to each piece of hold information with three consecutive pieces of hold information as an upper limit, the special information is provided under the condition that the number of pieces of hold information is less than three. If the variable display is to be started, there is inevitably a difference between the number displayed in the number display area CE and the number of times the special variable display is actually executed in the special game state. The processing in steps S2205 to S2207 is a device for suppressing the occurrence of such a sense of incongruity due to the deviation.

  Returning to the description of step S2201, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if it is determined that a change command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, it is determined whether a special variation display continuation command is received from notification / effect control device 610 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the display control process is terminated after the display mode confirmation process in the first variable display area ME1 is performed in step S2209. By this confirmation process, the special variation display mode temporarily set in advance is executed as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, it is determined whether or not any of the first change command and the second change command for changing the special variation display mode is received from the notification / production control device 610. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, the display mode changing process in the first variable display area ME1 is performed in step S2211, and then the display control process is terminated. In the change process, a process for changing the special variation display mode temporarily set in advance at the above-described branch is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2212. In step S2212, it is determined whether a change end command is received from main controller 162 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2212, the display control process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2212, the process advances to step S2213 to execute the process of ending the variable display in the second variable display area ME2. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the game time is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area ME2.

  In the present embodiment, by delaying the timing for determining the game times (holding information) to be subjected to the special variation display from the start timing of the special variation display (the start timing of the game times serving as the trigger for the special variation display), One of the features is that a configuration that easily secures the number of game times (holding information) to be subjected to special variation display is realized.

  Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 36, the ball entry timing (holding information acquisition timing) and the special variation display target in the special game state (specifically, the second special game state). The relationship with the timing of finalizing the game times (holding information) to be described will be described. In FIG. 36, a plurality of patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 3) are illustrated. In addition, the confirmation timing in each display time is displayed separately from other timings by a one-dot chain line.

  At the timing of ta1 when the previous special variation display is finished, an image in which the girl has missed the fairy is displayed in the first variation display area ME1 of the display screen 75a, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment result is displayed in the second variation display area ME2. Is displayed. This display is stopped and displayed for a certain period as a result of the special variation display. At the timing of ta2 when the stop display is finished, the number of the hold information related to the right action ball entering portion 63 is “1”, and based on this hold information, the action ball entry portion display portion DR of the main display portion D While the variable display is started, the special variable display is started on the display screen 75a. Based on this, the number of stored hold information is subtracted from “1” to “0”. In addition, “1” is subtracted from the remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 75a, and “1” is also subtracted from the remaining number of times of support in the high frequency support mode.

  FIG. 36 illustrates a case where the second special gaming state is set. As already described, the second special game state is a game state in which one special variation display is performed over a maximum of three game times (holding information). However, at the timing of ta2, the number of hold information is “1” and does not satisfy “3” which is the specified number.

  As for the special variation display that starts at the timing of ta2, a display that is provisionally determined on the assumption that the condition regarding the number of pending information is satisfied by a later confirmation timing is displayed. The hold information (game times) that is the trigger for starting the special variation display corresponds to the first variation display time T1 described above. For this reason, the fluctuation display on the right-hand actuated ball display unit DR is continued for 12 seconds thereafter.

  From the timing ta3 to the timing ta6, the right-hand actuating entrance 63 is properly entered, and the number of stored hold information reaches the storage upper limit “4”. In particular, at the timing of ta4, the number of stored hold information is “2”, and the same number (“3”) of hold information as the above specified number is added with the hold information that triggered the special variation display. Is secured.

  At the timing of ta7 when a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed from the timing of ta2, the above-described confirmation process is executed. In pattern 1, the number of stored hold information already exceeds the specified number. For this reason, at the timing of ta7, the display mode of the special variation display is determined so as to remain temporarily set at the timing of ta2.

  At the timing of ta8, the winning result (disappearance result) related to the hold information that triggered the start of the special variation display is clearly shown in the second variation display region ME2, and the animation display branches in the first variation display region ME1. Will be reached. At this time, the lottery result of the game times is confirmed and displayed on the right-hand acted ball-indicating portion display portion DR of the main display portion D.

  This confirmation display is continued until the timing ta9, and the next game time is started at the timing ta9. Specifically, “1” is spent on the hold information relating to the right-hand actuated entrance unit 63, and the game turn is started. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working ball entry part is started, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed also in the second fluctuation display area ME2 is started. At this time, animation display is continued (so-called development display) in the first variable display area ME1.

  The game times started at the timing of ta9 correspond to the second variable display time described above. For this reason, the lottery result of the game times is notified at the timing of ta10 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of ta9. Specifically, the winning result (outgoing result) relating to the game times is clearly indicated in the second variation display area ME2, and the game result lottery results are also confirmed and displayed on the right-hand actuated ball display unit DR. The Rukoto.

  This confirmation display is continued until the timing ta11, and the next game time is started at the timing ta11. Specifically, “1” is spent on the hold information relating to the right-hand actuated entrance unit 63, and the game turn is started. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working ball entry part is started, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed also in the second fluctuation display area ME2 is started. At this time, animation display is continued (so-called development display) in the first variable display area ME1.

  The game times started at the timing of ta11 correspond to the second variation display time described above. For this reason, the lottery result of the game times is notified at the timing of ta12 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of ta11. Specifically, the winning result (outgoing result) relating to the game times is clearly indicated in the second variation display area ME2, and the game result lottery results are also confirmed and displayed on the right-hand actuated ball display unit DR. The Rukoto. The special variation display is executed over three game times, and when the special variation display ends at this timing, the lottery result is clearly indicated. Since pattern 1 does not correspond to the winning result, in the first variation display area ME1 of the display screen 75a, a state in which the girl character has finally escaped the fairy (that is, the result of being out of place) is displayed.

  This confirmation display is continued until the timing of ta13, and moves to the next game time at the timing of ta13.

  Next, a case where the number of hold information required at the confirmation timing has not reached the specified number will be described with reference to Pattern 2.

  At the timing of ta13, “1” is spent on the hold information relating to the right-hand actuated ball entering section 63, and the game turn is started. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working ball entry part is started, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed also in the second fluctuation display area ME2 is started. At this time, animation display is continued (so-called development display) in the first variable display area ME1.

  At this time, the number of the hold information is “2”, and the special variation display is started based on the hold information stored earlier. Similarly to pattern 1, pattern 2 also has a predetermined number of reserved information at the start of the special variation display, so that the special variation display is also given off.

  As with the pattern 1, the first variation display time T1 is applied to the game times that are triggered by the special variation display started at the timing of ta13. For this reason, the confirmation timing is reached during the game.

  At the timing of ta14 when a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed from the timing of ta13, the above-described confirmation process is executed. In the pattern 2, the winning to the right operation ball entering portion 63 has not occurred between the timing ta <b> 13 and the elapse of a predetermined period. In other words, the number of the hold information related to the right operation entering ball unit 63 remains “1”.

  For this reason, at the timing of ta14, the target of the special fluctuation display is set so that the two pieces of hold information including the hold information of “1” currently stored in the hold information that is the trigger of the special change display are the target. determine. Since the number of objects determined here is less than the specified number “3”, the special variation display mode temporarily set at the timing ta13 is changed. As a result, the special variation display is shortened from one corresponding to three game times to one corresponding to two game times.

  Here, in the pattern 2, a winning to the right working ball entering portion 63 occurs at the timing of ta16 after the timing of ta15 (confirmation timing) or the timing of ta17, and the hold information related to the right working ball entering portion 63 is displayed. Although newly acquired, since these acquisition timings are after the timing of ta15, the newly acquired hold information is not subject to the special fluctuation display, and the next special fluctuation display ( Display times).

  Next, a case where a prescribed number of hold information is already secured at the start timing of the special variation display will be briefly described with reference to the pattern 3. As described above, even when a sufficient number of hold information is secured, the timing for determining the effect mode of the special variation display is the same as the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 described above. Specifically, it becomes the timing of ta21 when a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed since the start of the special variation display at the timing of ta20. Also in the pattern 3, since the first variation display time T1 is applied to the game times that become the start of the special variation display, the hold information is not reduced by the timing of ta21. At the timing of ta21, it is confirmed that the number of stored hold information has already exceeded the specified number, and the display mode of the special variation display is temporarily set at the timing of ta20. It will be confirmed.

  According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

  In game machines of the type in which game balls flow down the game area PE, the degree of attention is improved by diversifying the movement of the game balls, so the number of reserved information stored as the game progresses However, a constant number (for example, the upper limit number) is not always ensured. In this type of gaming machine, if the special fluctuation display depends on the execution condition that “the number (prescribed number) of hold information corresponding to the special fluctuation display is stored”, the special fluctuation display is displayed. Opportunities that can be executed are easily affected by the number of pending information. As a result, the chances of executing the special variation display are reduced, and it becomes difficult to exhibit the effect of improving the special variation display well.

  Further, when the configuration is such that the target hold information is determined by being bound by the number of special information stored at the start of the special variation display, the function of generating the above-described pseudo high probability state is good. I am concerned that it will not work.

  In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, first, the special variation display is started, the number of stored hold information is confirmed in the middle, and the special change display is performed based on the confirmed number of hold information. With the configuration in which the target game times are determined, when the hold information is stored while the special variation display is being performed, the game times that are the targets of the special change display are added to the hold information. It can be determined. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

  Specifically, even when the number of stored hold information is less than the specified number, for the time being, by starting the special variation display assuming that at least the specified number of hold information is secured, In other words, by starting the special variation display in advance regardless of whether or not the number of hold information more than the specified number is stored, the hold information may accumulate during the special change display and reach the specified number. . Thereby, it is possible to execute the special variation display according to the specified number and suitably generate the pseudo high probability state.

  By entering the high-frequency support mode, the occurrence frequency of entering the right operation entry portion 63 increases. Thereby, the player can play a game while suppressing investment as much as possible. By providing such a difference, the player plays a game while expecting to enter the high-frequency support mode, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  In the high frequency support mode, the frequency of entering the ball is increased, so that the number of stored hold information is easily secured. Generally, in such a situation, a so-called time shortening function acts to digest the hold information one after another. In this case, for example, on the display screen, a predetermined pattern combination such as a number is stopped and displayed one after another, and the display mode of the display unit tends to be monotonous due to the monotonous hold information being digested.

  In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the special variation display is executed over a plurality of game times on the display screen 75a in the high frequency support mode, the special variation display is performed. It is possible to lengthen the period for executing, and it is possible to give various variations to the specific variation display. Therefore, even if it is a case where the time saving function mentioned above is exhibited, it can suppress that a display mode becomes monotonous. In addition, since the reservation information is easily secured, the various functions shown in the first embodiment can be performed well.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special variation display is repeatedly executed during the high frequency support mode, the actual number of game times being executed and the display screen 75a (specifically, the first variation display area ME1) are displayed. A difference occurs in the number of pseudo game times (pseudo game times or display times). That is, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is granted at one display time during the second switching mode (during a specific effect display) without changing the winning probability in one game time substantially. The probability of winning the determination can be changed (increased) in a pseudo manner. For example, in the specific effect display executed over two game times, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about twice that of a normal game, and the specific effect executed over three game times. In the display, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game in the high frequency support mode, and to contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Here, how to secure a sufficient number of special information is an important issue in exhibiting the above-described function of generating the pseudo high probability state. By applying the technical idea shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to stably exhibit a function that generates a pseudo high probability state.

  The first variation display time T1 is set for the game times corresponding to the first game time among the game times to be subjected to one special variation display. By adopting a configuration in which the above-described confirmation process is performed during this game round, even if the number of stored hold information is less than the specified number, the hold information is newly stored during the special variation display. It becomes possible to increase the possibility. Even when the confirmation timing of the hold information is delayed from the effect display start timing, if a sufficient number of hold information is not secured, the restriction on the check timing becomes strong. In this regard, if at least the one corresponding to the first game time corresponds to the first variation display time T1, the restriction can be weakened, and it is easy to earn time for securing new hold information.

  The first variation display time T1 is applied to the first hold information among the hold information newly stored after the confirmation timing described above. That is, the hold information that triggers when the special variable display is started corresponds to the first variable display time T1. As a result, even when the special variation display is repeated, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that a sufficient number of reserved information cannot be secured in the subsequent special variation display.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by setting the special variation display to be parted and started regardless of the number of stored hold information, the number exceeding the storage upper limit number of the hold information is the target of the special change display. It becomes possible to do. That is, it is possible to set the fourth special game state in which the specified number is “5”. In this case, by setting the support count to “100” times, it is possible to contribute to diversification of the pseudo high probability zone of “20” times + α in accordance with other special game states.

<Third Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when a transition is made to the special game state, a series of animation displays using characters and the like are executed over a plurality of game times in the first variable display area ME1 of the display screen 75a. In the second variation display area ME2 of the display screen 75a, the symbol combination corresponding to each game time is changed / stopped. However, the specific effect display mode is not limited to this. In order to realize a series of special variation displays while showing the lottery results of each game time, the display mode can be changed as follows. Hereinafter, a modified example of the special variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode on the display screen 75a, and FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing a symbol string scroll-displayed on the display screen 75a.

  As shown in FIG. 37, on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three variable display areas are set so as to divide the display screen 75a into left and right equal parts. An image imitating a so-called slot machine reel is displayed in a one-to-one correspondence with each of these variable display areas. In the following description, among the images simulating the reels, the left one is called “left reel image F1,” the middle one is called “middle reel image F2,” and the right one is called “right reel image F3.”

  When the special variation display is started, all the reel images F1 to F3 are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction, and finally the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot on the display screen 75a in a state where all the reel images are stopped and displayed. Is displayed so as to be notified that the jackpot result has been obtained.

  In the present embodiment, a total of five combination lines (effective lines) are set on the display screen 75a. More specifically, on the display screen 75a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. Further, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5 are set on the display screen 75a. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the left reel image F1 → the right reel image F3 → the middle reel image F2, and a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same numerals) is formed on any effective line. When the variation display of all the reel images F1 to F3 is finished in the state of being played, a big hit video is displayed as the occurrence of a normal big hit result or a probable big hit result.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left reel image F1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row) and the middle reel image F2 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 picture rows), the right reel image F3 can also be referred to as a third picture row (or third picture row).

  As shown in FIG. 38, various symbols are arranged in a predetermined order on each of the reel images F1 to F3. The symbol row constituting each of the reel images F1 to F3 includes “red 7” symbols (numbers 17 and 15 in the left reel image F1, number 16 in the middle reel image F2, number 17 and number 15 in the right reel image F3). And “white 7” symbol (see No. 10 in the left reel image F1, No. 6 in the middle reel image F2, No. 10 and No. 3 in the right reel image F3).

  When the combination of “white 7” symbol is stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned effective lines L1 to L5, it is informed that the normal jackpot result is won, and when the combination of “red 7” symbol is stopped and displayed, The winner will be notified of the result.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the flow of the special variation display executed during the special game state will be described. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram showing a special variation display corresponding to a loss result, and FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing a special variation display corresponding to a jackpot result. 39 and 40 illustrate special variation displays corresponding to the second type special game state.

  First, with reference to FIG. 39 (Pattern 1), the special variation display corresponding to the outlier result will be described. When the special variation display starts at the timing tb1, all the reel images F1 to F3 that have been stopped and displayed until then start scroll display.

  After a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed from the timing tb1, the left reel image F1 is first stopped and displayed, and then the right reel image F3 is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is confirmed that a plurality of target hold information is stored at the confirmation timing described above, the “7” symbol of the left reel image F1 and the “7” symbol of the right reel image F3 Stops on the effective line (specifically, the middle stage line L2) and enters a so-called reach state. When the number of target hold information is singular, the reel images F1 and F3 are stopped and displayed so as not to reach the reach state.

  The scroll display of the middle reel image F2 ends at the timing of tb2 when the first game time of the three target game times ends. Since the game times correspond to the disengagement results, at this point, the middle reel image F2 is stopped and displayed so that the “7” symbol of the middle reel image F2 is disengaged upstream of the middle line L2. It becomes.

  At the timing of tb3 when a predetermined interval (stop display period) has elapsed, the middle reel image F2 changes again so as to shift downstream by a predetermined number of frames in accordance with the start of the second game time. At this time, since the left and right reel images F1 and F3 remain stopped, the “7” symbol of the middle reel image F2 reaches the middle line L2 and is stopped and displayed on the middle line. As a result, the fact that the jackpot has been won will be notified. However, since this game time also corresponds to the result of losing, when the variable display ends at the timing of tb4, “7” of the middle reel image F2 is displayed. The symbol is stopped before reaching the middle line L2.

  After that, at the timing of tb5 when the predetermined interval (stop display period) has passed again, the middle reel image F2 is shifted downstream by a predetermined number of frames in accordance with the start of the third (last) game round. It will change again. At the timing of tb6 when the game round ends, the “7” symbol of the middle reel image F2 is stopped and displayed so as not to be positioned on the middle line L2. Specifically, since this game times also corresponds to the result of losing, by not stopping the combination of symbols “7” on the active line, the player is notified of the result of losing. It becomes.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tb7, scroll display of all the reel images F1 to F3 is started, and the next special variation display is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 (pattern 2), the special variation display corresponding to the winning result will be described. Note that FIG. 40 illustrates a case where the third (last) game time corresponds to the jackpot among the three game times that are the targets of special variation display.

  When the special variation display starts at the timing tb7, all the reel images F1 to F3 that have been stopped and displayed until then start scroll display. After a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed from the timing tb7, the left reel image F1 is first stopped and then the right reel image F3 is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is confirmed that a plurality of target hold information is stored at the confirmation timing described above, the “7” symbol of the left reel image F1 and the “7” symbol of the right reel image F3 Stops on the effective line (specifically, the middle stage line L2) and enters a so-called reach state.

  The scroll display of the middle reel image F2 ends at the timing of tb8 when the first game time of the three target game times ends. Since the game times correspond to the disengagement result, at this time, the middle reel image F2 is stopped and displayed so that the “7” symbol of the middle reel image F2 is disengaged upstream from the middle stage line L2. It will be.

  At the timing of tb9 when a predetermined interval (stop display period) has elapsed, the middle reel image F2 changes again so as to shift downstream by a predetermined number of frames in accordance with the start of the second game time. At this time, since the left and right reel images F1 and F3 remain stopped, the “7” symbol of the middle reel image F2 reaches the middle line L2 and is stopped and displayed on the middle line. As a result, it is informed that the jackpot has been won, but since this game time corresponds to the result of losing, when the variable display is finished at the timing of tb10, “7” of the middle reel image F2 is displayed. The symbol is stopped before reaching the middle line L2.

  After that, at the timing of tb11 when the predetermined interval (stop display period) has passed again, the middle reel image F2 is shifted downstream by a predetermined number of frames in accordance with the start of the third (last) game round. It will change again. At the timing tb12 when the game round ends, the “7” symbol of the middle reel image F2 is stopped and displayed so as to be positioned on the middle line L2. Specifically, since this game time corresponds to the winning result, the player is notified that the winning result is obtained by displaying the combination of “7” symbols on the active line. It becomes.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tb13, the combination of the “7” symbols located on the middle stage line L2 is flash-displayed, and the other symbols are darkened. This clearly indicates that the winning result has been obtained. This display is continued for a certain period, and it is clearly indicated to the player that the result has been achieved.

  When special variation display is performed over a plurality of game times, a certain link is made between the game times and special variation display (by setting branch points) while performing a series of effect display. The effect display can be switched according to the number of hold information and the presence / absence of a winning result. Here, in the configuration in which the first variation display time T1 is applied to the game times that trigger the start of the special variation display, and the second variation display time T2 is applied to the other game times, the branch point has a special variation. It is assumed that there will be more restrictions on the smooth display of a series of effects concentrated in the latter half of the display.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, the game times corresponding to the second variation display time T2 can be made to appear as if the special effect continues by varying the middle reel image F2, and the second variation. It is possible to realize a configuration that is not easily affected by setting a short time as the display time T2. According to such a configuration, in the configuration in which a series of special variation displays over a plurality of game times, even if the number of target game times can be changed, various effects such as the above-described enhancement of interest are exhibited. It is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the control load caused by this.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, although 1st fluctuation | variation display area ME1 and 2nd fluctuation | variation display area ME2 were distinguished, several functions displayed on the display screen 75a are given by the function which united them. Information can be prevented from being provided separately. In this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the player due to the execution of the special variation display by collecting points to be noted.

<Fourth embodiment>
In each of the embodiments described in detail above, it is suggested whether the state is the first special game state to the third special game state by the background image on the display screen 75a or the like under the situation where the special game state is set. The player is notified of the advantage when the special variation display is executed. However, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the advantage is different from the above embodiments.

  When the special variation display is actually executed, it is not always possible to secure the reserved information more than the prescribed number described above. Therefore, even in the same special gaming state, there may be a difference in the advantage in the special variation display. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, when the special variation display is executed, the number of the hold information (game times) that is the target is won in the game ball, more specifically, in the right operation ball entering unit 63. It is characterized by having the structure which alert | reports the advantage for every special fluctuation | variation display to the player by setting it as the structure shown using a game ball | bowl.

  The characteristic configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a schematic view of the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, the basic configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment. Therefore, explanations are provided for the common configurations, and differences from the second embodiment will be mainly described.

  The game board is provided with a ball passage unit 700 into which a game ball that has won a prize in the right-hand action ball entry portion 63 flows. The ball passage unit 700 is formed with a guide passage 701 that guides the game balls won in the right operation ball entering portion 63 to the game ball collecting mechanism of the collective plate. The guide passage 701 has a passage width or the like that is slightly larger than the diameter size of the game ball so that a plurality of game balls do not pass through the same location at the same time.

  The guide passage 701 is branched at a midway position, and the game ball discharge path is changed according to the situation. Hereinafter, a passage on the upstream side of the branch portion is referred to as an upstream side passage 702, and a passage on the downstream side of the branch portion is referred to as a downstream side passage 703.

  The upstream-side passage 702 extends in the vertical direction, and a ball entry detection sensor 721 is disposed at a midway position (a position near the right operation port 63a). The ball entry sensor 721 is connected to the main controller 162, and the main controller 162 detects the right action ball entry portion 63 (the right action port) based on the detection information (detection signal) output from the ball entry sensor 721. It is grasped whether or not a winning in 63a) has occurred.

  The downstream-side passage 703 includes a first passage 706 and a second passage 707 that branch from the branch portion 705 into two branches. The game ball that has flowed down the upstream passage 702 flows into either the first passage 706 or the second passage 707.

  The branch portion 705 is provided with a passage switching mechanism 731 that can be switched between a state in which the game ball that has reached the branch portion 705 is guided to the first passage 706 and a state in which the game ball is guided to the second passage 707. Here, the relationship between the guide passage 701 and the passage switching mechanism 731 will be supplementarily described.

  The inlet portion of the second passage 707 is located immediately below the outlet portion of the upstream passage 702 and opened upward, whereas the inlet portion of the first passage 706 is located away from the extension of the upstream passage 702. Is open sideways.

  The passage switching mechanism 731 includes a movable piece 732 that can be switched to a position that closes the inlet portion of the second passage 707 and a position that does not block the inlet portion, and a drive unit 733 (specifically, a solenoid) for the movable piece 732. Have. The drive unit 733 is connected to the notification / production control device 610 and is driven based on a signal from the notification / production control device 610.

  In a state where the entrance portion of the second passage 707 is blocked by the movable piece 732, the movable piece 732 functions as a guiding means for guiding the game ball that has reached the branch portion 705 to the first passage 706 and reaches the branch portion 705. Game balls that have flown into the first passage 706 and the entrance of the second passage 707 is not blocked by the movable piece 732, the game balls that have reached the branch portion 705 flow into the second passage 707 as they are. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the first passage 706 has a characteristic configuration. In the following description, with reference to whether or not guidance to the first passage 706 is possible, the state of guiding the game ball that has reached the branch portion 705 to the first passage 706 is referred to as the guidance state, and the first passage 706 is referred to as the passage switching mechanism 731. A state where no guidance is performed is referred to as a non-induction state.

  In the special game state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a signal is output to the drive unit 733, and the passage switching mechanism 731 is switched from the non-guide state to the guide state. On the other hand, when the game state is not in the special game state, the passage switching mechanism 731 is maintained in the non-induction state, and the game ball that has won the right operation ball entering portion 63 flows into the second passage 707 through the upstream side passage 702. . The game ball that has flowed into the second passage 707 is directly discharged to the game ball collection mechanism.

  A ball feeding mechanism 734 that feeds the game balls that have flowed into the first passage 706 one by one from the upstream side to the downstream side is formed in the middle of the first passage 706. The ball feed mechanism 734 includes a ball feed member 735 that is rotatably supported and a drive unit 736 (specifically, a stepping motor) that rotates the ball feed member 735. The drive unit 736 is connected to the notification / production control device 610 and is driven based on a signal from the notification / production control device 610.

  In the first passage 706, the portion upstream of the ball feed mechanism 734 is a standby passage 711 for temporarily waiting for the game ball, and the process of discharging the game ball won in the right operation ball entry portion 63. The function of temporarily storing at is provided. The passage length of the standby passage 711 is set so that the same number of game balls as the upper limit number of reserved storage by the main controller 162 can be made to wait in a line.

  The ball feeding member 735 has a circular shape, and an accommodation recess for accommodating one game ball is formed on the outer periphery thereof. When the ball feed member 735 rotates, the game ball waiting in the standby passage 711 enters this accommodation recess, and one of the ball feed members 735 moves downstream from the ball feed mechanism 734 as the ball feed member 735 rotates. It will be sent one by one.

  In the first passage 706, a portion on the downstream side of the ball feeding mechanism 734 is a stopping passage 712 that can stop the game ball, and a discharge passage 713 that is located on the downstream side of the stopping passage 712 and continues to the gaming ball collection mechanism. And is composed of. More specifically, a stopper mechanism 737 capable of preventing outflow of game balls from the stopping passage 712 is provided at the most downstream position of the stopping passage 712, and a passage on the downstream side of the stopper mechanism 737 The portion is a discharge passage 713.

  The stopper mechanism 737 comes into contact with the game ball that is stopped in the stop passage 712 from the downstream side of the passage, thereby retreating from the stop position and the stop passage 712 to prevent the game ball from flowing out from the stop passage 712 to the discharge passage 713. A movable piece 738 that can be switched to a release position that does not hinder the outflow of game balls to the discharge passage 713 and a drive unit 739 that moves the movable piece 738 to a blocking position and a release position are provided.

  The drive unit 739 is connected to the notification / production control device 610 and is driven based on a signal from the notification / production control device 610. As a result, the movable piece 738 moves to the blocking position and the release position. The state in which the movable piece 738 protrudes into the passage and prevents the game ball from flowing out of the stopping passage 712 is the stopper mechanism 737 in the blocking state of the stopper mechanism 737, and the movable piece 738 is retracted from the passage and played from the stopping passage 712. The state where the outflow of the sphere is allowed is the released state of the stopper mechanism 737.

  The stop passage 712 is inclined obliquely with respect to the vertical direction, and the game balls located in the stop passage 712 can be stopped in a state of being aligned in a line. That is, when the stopper mechanism 737 is blocked and the game balls are collected in the stop passage 712, the game balls are stopped so as to form a single row with the game balls contacting the movable piece 738 as the head. It will be.

  The passage length of the stop passage 712 is set so that the same number of game balls as the maximum number (4 in the present embodiment) in the special game state can be stopped. That is, one to four game balls can be stopped in the stop passage 712.

  Here, the ball path unit 700 is attached to the game board in a state where the housing constituting the guide path 701 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material and is exposed to the front of the game machine through an opening formed in the game board. It has been. The front portion of the housing is located on the same plane as the front surface of the game board, and allows game balls to pass through the front. However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is technically meaningful to make it possible to visually recognize the game balls stopped in the stop passage 712, and the visibility of these stopped game balls is ensured. As described above, the arrangement of the nail 69 and the like is devised so that the game ball does not easily pass through the front of the ball passage unit 700 (specifically, the portion that is flush with the game board).

  A portion of the housing that is flush with the game board is provided with a decorative region on which various decorative patterns are printed and a non-decorative region on which the decorative pattern is not printed. For this decoration area, a function for restricting the portion positioned behind the guide passage 701 to be invisible is given, and for the non-decoration area, a portion positioned behind the guide passage 701 is visible. Is granted.

  More specifically, as distinguished by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 41, the portion corresponding to the upstream portion of the stop passage 712 and the discharge passage 713 in the front portion of the housing is a non-decorative region, and the front of the gaming machine Visibility from is secured. On the other hand, portions other than the above in the front portion of the housing are decorative areas, which are not visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  A specific portion SP into which a game ball flows is formed in an upstream portion of the discharge passage 713, that is, a portion where visibility is ensured. Immediately below the specific part SP is the decorative area described above. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the specific part SP is immediately outside the player's field of view.

  In the guide passage 701, a light emitting body (not shown) is provided as a light emitting means for supplying light to the passage in a portion where the visibility of the game ball is secured. The light emitter is connected to the notification / production control device 610, and emits light when a signal is input from the notification / production control device 610 in a special gaming state. In other words, during the special game state, light is emitted to the stop passage 712 and the like to emit bright light, thereby improving the degree of attention to the stop passage 712 and ensuring the visibility of the game ball being stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the guide passage 701 changes based on the state of the passage switching mechanism 731, the ball feed mechanism 734, and the stopper mechanism 737. When driving these various configurations 731, 734, 737, the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712, whether or not the game balls are waiting in the standby passage 711, and the standby passage 711 is full. It will be referred to whether or not.

  As already described, the position of the Nth game ball when the N (1 to 4) game balls are stopped is uniquely determined in the stop passage 712, and the stop passage 712 is stopped at each of these positions. A first detection sensor 741 to a fourth detection sensor 744 that detect a game ball are arranged to correspond to each position on a one-to-one basis. These detection sensors 741 to 744 are connected to the notification / production control device 610, and the notification / production control device 610 is a game ball parked in the stop passage 712 based on information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 741 to 744. It is possible to grasp the number of

  In addition, regarding the waiting passage 711, the position of the Nth game ball when N (1 to 4) game balls are stopped is uniquely determined, and the game is stopped at each of these positions. A detection sensor for detecting a sphere is provided. Specifically, a lower limit detection sensor 746 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first game ball, and an upper limit detection sensor 747 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fourth game ball. These detection sensors 746 and 747 are connected to the notification / production control device 610, and a game ball waits in the standby passage 711 based on information (detection signal) from the lower limit detection sensor 746 in the notification / production control device 610. It is possible to grasp whether or not the stop passage 712 is full based on information (detection signal) from the upper limit detection sensor 747.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described notification function is exhibited by controlling the guidance mode of the game ball by the ball passage unit 700 by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610. Therefore, the process executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610, specifically, the hold special notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The hold special notification process is a process executed as part of the regular process (normal process).

  In the on-hold special notification process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is in effect. If it is determined in step S2301 that the game is in the special game state, the process proceeds to step S2302, and a path switching process is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43A, in the path switching process, it is determined in step S2401 whether a path switching condition is satisfied. Specifically, based on the detection information from the upper limit detection sensor 747, whether or not the number of game balls stored (waiting) in the standby passage 711 has reached the upper limit (four in this embodiment) That is, it is determined whether or not the standby passage 711 is full.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401, a discharge passage closing process is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 733 of the passage switching mechanism 731 to execute processing for switching the passage switching mechanism 731 from the non-induction state to the guidance state. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 43 (b1) → FIG. 43 (b2), the flow path of the game ball is changed from the second passage 707 to the first passage 706. In addition, when already in the guidance state, the state is maintained.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if it is determined that the standby passage 711 is full, the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, a discharge passage opening process is executed. Specifically, output of the drive signal to the drive unit 733 of the passage switching mechanism 731 is stopped, and processing for switching the passage switching mechanism 731 from the guidance state to the non-guidance state is executed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 43 (b3), the flow path of the game ball is changed from the first passage 706 to the second passage 707. In addition, when already in the non-induction state, it maintains in that state.

  In the present embodiment, the storage upper limit number of the hold information related to the right operation ball entering section 63 is four, and the hold information is stored even if a winning to the right operation ball entering section 63 occurs in this state. Never happen. In other words, such a game ball is not an opportunity for a winning lottery. By performing the passage switching process, it is avoided that excessive game balls are stored.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 42, after the passage switching process is executed in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303 and the ball feeding process is executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44A, in the ball feeding process, the ball feeding execution process is performed based on the fact that various conditions are satisfied. In the condition determination process, it is first determined in step S2501 whether or not the ball is being fed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a driving signal is being output to the driving unit 736 of the ball feeding mechanism 734. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the ball feeding process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period described later has elapsed since the start of special variation display. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the ball feeding process is terminated as it is.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 has reached a specified number related to this special variation display. Specifically, the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 is grasped based on the detection information from the detection sensors 741 to 744, and the grasped number is compared with the prescribed number. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the ball feeding process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not a game ball is waiting in the standby passage 711 (whether or not it is stored). Specifically, based on the detection information from the lower limit detection sensor 746, it is determined whether or not a game ball exists at the most downstream position of the standby passage 711. If a negative determination is made in step S2504, the ball feeding process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the process advances to step S2505 to perform a ball feed execution process. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 736 of the ball feed mechanism 734 to rotate the ball feed member 735 once. As a result, among the game balls waiting in the waiting passage 711 shown in FIG. 44 (b 1) → FIG. 44 (b 2), the one located at the most downstream will move to the stopping passage 712. Note that the state of the ball feeding member 735 shown in FIG. 44 (b1) is the initial state, and the ball feeding member that has rotated once by the output of the drive signal returns to the initial state again.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 42, after the ball feeding process is executed in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304, and the stop control process is executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45 (a), in the stop control process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the special variation display 2601. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602, and a switching process to the blocking state is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the drive unit 739 of the stopper mechanism 737 to switch to the blocking state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 45 (b1), the outflow of game balls from the stop passage 712 is prevented, and the game balls flowing into the stop passage 712 are accumulated. This state is maintained until processing in step S2604 described later is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of special variation display. If a negative determination is made in step S2603, the stop control process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604, and a process for switching to the release state is executed. Specifically, output of drive vibration to the drive unit 739 of the stopper mechanism 737 is stopped and the stopper mechanism 737 is returned to the released state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 45 (b2) → FIG. 45 (b3), the game ball stopped in the stop passage 712 flows down and flows into the specific part SP (discharge passage 713).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the determination mode of the stop period will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special effect mode determination process executed by the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control apparatus 610. About this special effect mode confirmation process, a part of process is added to the special effect mode determination process shown in FIG. Therefore, explanations are used for common processing contents.

  After the special variation display mode is determined in steps S2704, S2707, and S2710, the process proceeds to step S2705 to execute a discharge timing determination process. Specifically, in step S2704, it is determined how the special variation display being executed proceeds, and based on the information, it is determined at what timing the game ball stopped in the stop passage 712 is discharged. To do. As described in the above embodiments, a series of animations are displayed as special variation display. Each table storage area 613a of the ROM 613 corresponds to each special variation display so that the discharged game balls flow into the specific part SP at a time before the lottery result is notified through a series of animation displays. A timing table in which the discharge timing is set is stored, and the discharge timing is determined with reference to the timing table. That is, the game ball is set to be discharged from the stop passage 712 when the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special variation display. Whether or not the predetermined period thus determined is reached is determined by referring to the values of the special variation display timing counters provided in the various counter areas 614b of the RAM 614.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 42 again, after executing the process of step S2304 or when a negative determination is made in step S2301, the preparation / return process of steps S2305 to S2309 is executed.

  First, in step S2305, it is determined whether it is a transition timing to the special gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306, the stop passage light emission process is executed, and the on-hold special notification process ends. In the stop passage light emission process, a process of lighting the light emitter provided in the ball path unit 700 is performed. Thereby, the stop passage 712 is brightly illuminated. This is a contrivance for notifying the player of a notable location and improving the visibility of the game ball that is stopped in the stop passage 712.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2307, the special hold notification process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2308 to execute a stop passage extinguishing process. In step S2307, a process for turning off the light-emitting body turned on in step S2306 is performed. Thereafter, in step S2309, a state return process is executed, and the on-hold special notification process ends. In the state return process, it is determined whether or not a game ball remains in the standby passage 711. If it is determined that a game ball remains, the ball feeding member 735 is driven to remain in the standby passage 711. The game ball is discharged through the stop passage 712. It should be noted that since the stopping passage 712 is already extinguished at the timing when the state return is performed, it is avoided that such a flow of game balls is conspicuous.

  In the present embodiment, by notifying the player of the game times (holding information) that is the target of the special variation display, it is suggested that the expectation level of winning the big hit in the special variation display is suggested. I am trying.

  Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 47, the ball entry timing (holding information acquisition timing) in a special gaming state (specifically, the second special gaming state), the target of special fluctuation display The relationship between the timing at which the game times (holding information) to be determined are confirmed and the discharge timing of the game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 will be described. FIG. 36 illustrates a plurality of patterns (pattern 1 and pattern 2). Further, the confirmation timing and the game ball discharge timing in each display time are displayed by a one-dot chain line, and are displayed separately from other timings.

  At the timing of tc1 when the previous special variation display is finished, an image in which the girl has missed the fairy is displayed in the first variation display area ME1 of the display screen 75a, and the symbol combination corresponding to the outlier result is displayed in the second variation display area ME2. Is displayed. This display is stopped and displayed for a certain period as a result of the special variation display. At the timing of tc2 when the stop display is finished, the number of the hold information related to the right action ball entry portion 63 is “1”, and based on this hold information, the action ball entry portion display portion DR of the main display portion D While the variable display is started, the special variable display is started on the display screen 75a. Based on this, the number of stored hold information is subtracted from “1” to “0”. In addition, “1” is subtracted from the remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 75a, and “1” is also subtracted from the remaining number of times of support in the high frequency support mode.

  At the timing tc2, the number of game balls waiting in the standby passage 711 is “1”, and these game balls move to the stop passage 712. As a result, the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 is “1”. The stop passage 712 is visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the player can visually confirm that the game ball is stopped in the stop passage 712.

  FIG. 47 illustrates a case where the second special gaming state is set. As already described, the second special game state is a game state in which one special variation display is performed over a maximum of three game times (holding information). However, at the timing of tc2, the number of hold information is “1” and does not satisfy the prescribed number “3”.

  As for the special variation display that starts at the timing of tc2, a display that is provisionally determined on the assumption that the condition relating to the number of pending information is satisfied by the later confirmation timing is displayed. The hold information (game times) that is the trigger for starting the special variation display corresponds to the first variation display time T1 described above. For this reason, the fluctuation display on the right-hand actuated ball display unit DR is continued for 12 seconds thereafter.

  From the timing of tc3 to the timing of tc6, the right-handed operation entering portion 63 is properly entered, and the number of stored hold information reaches the storage upper limit number “4”. In particular, at the timing of tc4, the number of stored hold information is “2”, and the same number (“3”) of hold information as the above specified number is added with the hold information that triggered the start of the special variation display. Is secured.

  The game ball that has won the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63 at the timing of tc3 and the timing of tc4 reaches the stopping passage 712 via the standby passage 711. As a result, the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 is three. In addition, the game balls won at the timings tc5 and tc6 are subject to the next special variation display, and therefore do not reach the stop passage 712 and are in a standby state in the standby passage 711. As a result, the number of game balls waiting in the waiting passage 711 becomes “2” at the timing of tc6.

  At the timing of tc7 when a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tc2, the above-described confirmation process is executed. In pattern 1, the number of stored hold information already exceeds the specified number. For this reason, at the timing of tc7, the display mode of the special variation display is determined so as to remain temporarily set at the timing of tc2.

  At the timing tc8, the winning result (disappearance result) related to the hold information that triggered the start of the special variation display is clearly shown in the second variation display region ME2, and the animation display branches in the first variation display region ME1. Will be reached. At this time, the lottery result of the game times is confirmed and displayed on the right-hand acted ball-indicating portion display portion DR of the main display portion D.

  This confirmation display is continued until the timing of tc9, and moves to the next game time at the timing of tc9. Specifically, “1” is spent on the hold information relating to the right-hand actuated entrance unit 63, and the game turn is started. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working ball entry part is started, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed also in the second fluctuation display area ME2 is started. At this time, animation display is continued (so-called development display) in the first variable display area ME1.

  The game times started at the timing of tc9 corresponds to the second variable display time described above. For this reason, the lottery result of the game times is notified at the timing of tc10 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of tc9. Specifically, the winning result (outgoing result) relating to the game times is clearly indicated in the second variation display area ME2, and the game result lottery results are also confirmed and displayed on the right-hand actuated ball display unit DR. The Rukoto. In this way, even when the game times move next, the game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 are maintained as they are.

  This confirmation display is continued until the timing of tc12, and moves to the next game time at the timing of tc12. Specifically, “1” is spent on the hold information relating to the right-hand actuated entrance unit 63, and the game turn is started. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working ball entry part is started, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed also in the second fluctuation display area ME2 is started. At this time, animation display is continued (so-called development display) in the first variable display area ME1.

  Here, at the timing of tc11 before the timing of tc12 (before the final result is displayed during the interval), a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special variation display. That is, the game balls that are stopped in the stop passage 712 are discharged. The game balls discharged from the stop passage 712 flow into the specific part SP at once due to their own weight.

  The game times started at the timing of tc12 corresponds to the second variable display time described above. For this reason, the lottery result of the game times is notified at the timing of tc13 when 0.6 sec has elapsed from the timing of tc12. Specifically, the winning result (outgoing result) relating to the game times is clearly indicated in the second variation display area ME2, and the game result lottery results are also confirmed and displayed on the right-hand actuated ball display unit DR. The Rukoto. The special variation display is executed over three game times, and when the special variation display ends at this timing, the lottery result is clearly indicated. Since pattern 1 does not correspond to the winning result, in the first variation display area ME1 of the display screen 75a, a state in which the girl character has finally escaped the fairy (that is, the result of being out of place) is displayed.

  This confirmation display is continued until the timing of tc14, and moves to the next game time at the timing of tc14.

  Next, a case where the number of hold information required at the confirmation timing has not reached the specified number will be described with reference to Pattern 2.

  At the timing of tc14, “1” is spent on the hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63, and the game turn is started. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the display part DR for the right working ball entry part is started, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the symbols that are stopped and displayed also in the second fluctuation display area ME2 is started. At this time, animation display is continued (so-called development display) in the first variable display area ME1.

  At this time, the number of the hold information is “2”, and the special variation display is started based on the hold information stored earlier. Similarly to pattern 1, pattern 2 also has a predetermined number of reserved information at the start of the special variation display, so that the special variation display is also given off.

  As with the pattern 1, the first variation display time T1 is applied to the game times that are triggered by the special variation display started at the timing of tc14. For this reason, the confirmation timing is reached during the game.

  Further, at the timing of tc14, two game balls waiting in the waiting passage 711 move to the stopping passage 712. As a result, the number of game balls stopped in the standby passage 711 is “2”.

  At the timing of tc15 when a predetermined period (6 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tc14, the above-described confirmation process is executed. In the pattern 2, no winning is made to the right operation ball entering portion 63 from the timing of tc 14 until a predetermined period elapses. In other words, the number of the hold information related to the right operation entering ball unit 63 remains “1”.

  For this reason, at the timing of tc15, the target of the special fluctuation display is set so that the two pieces of hold information including the hold information “1” currently stored in the hold information that is the trigger of the special change display are the target. determine. Since the number of objects determined here is less than the prescribed number “3”, the special variation display mode temporarily set at the timing of tc14 is changed. As a result, the special variation display is shortened from one corresponding to three game times to one corresponding to two game times.

  In addition, since the winning to the right operation ball entering portion 63 did not occur between the timing of tc14 and the timing of tc15, the number of game balls stopped in the stopping passage 712 remains “2”, and further waiting The number of game balls waiting in the passage 711 also remains “0”.

  Here, in the pattern 2, a winning to the right working ball entering portion 63 occurs at a timing tc 16 to a timing tc 18 after the timing (confirmation timing) tc 15, and the holding information related to the right working ball entering portion 63 is displayed. Although newly acquired, since these acquisition timings are after the timing of tc15, the newly acquired hold information is not subject to the special fluctuation display, and the next special fluctuation display ( Display times).

  In addition, the game balls that have won the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63 at the timing of tc16 to the timing of tc18 remain in the standby passage 711, and the number of game balls waiting in the standby passage 711 is “0” → “1”. The number increases in the order of “2” → “3”, but the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 is maintained at “2”.

  Thereafter, the game ball that has stopped in the stop passage 712 at the timing of tc19 is discharged and flows into the specific part SP. Then, the special variation display ends at the timing of tc21 after the game ball is discharged.

  In the above pattern 1 and pattern 2, the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 is different by “2” / “3”. By such a difference in the number of stops, it is possible to tell the player that the expected value of winning the jackpot in one special variation display is higher in pattern 1 than in pattern 2.

  According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  Special variation display (display times) is executed over a plurality of game times. As a result, there is a difference between the number of actually executed game times and the number of pseudo game times (pseudo game times or display times) displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. . In other words, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is possible to simulate the probability of winning the determination at one display time while displaying a specific effect, without changing the actual win probability in one game time. Can be changed (increased). For example, in the special variation display executed over two game times, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about twice that of normal, and the special variation executed over three game times. In the display, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game and contribute to further improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

  Here, when the special variation display is executed, the degree of expectation that the privilege is given through the special variation display increases as the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 increases. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game ball that is stopped in the stop passage 712.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, more specific variation display is performed while giving a certain relationship between the actual hold information and the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 (while making the totals the same). The pseudo hold display can be performed in conformity with. This is an effect exhibited by the configuration in which the game ball actually won in the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63 is guided to the stopping passage 712.

  The game balls that are stopped in the stop passage 712 are kept stopped until a predetermined timing (specifically, the timing immediately before the result is displayed by the special variation display) before the special variation display ends. In this way, by maintaining the parked game ball as it is, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of expectation of the special variation display during execution of the special variation display, and the degree of attention to the special variation display is reduced and the original It can suppress that a production effect is not exhibited well.

  Each time the special variation display is performed, the game ball that has entered the right operation entrance portion 63 is stopped in the stop passage 712. Thus, by storing the game ball in the stop passage 712 every time the special variation display is performed, that is, when the special variation display is executed over a plurality of game times (special information), the game ball is stored. In this way, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between the latter and the game ball that is stopped among the progress of the game times and the progress of the special variation display.

  Discharging of the game balls that are stopped → End of special variation display → Notification of the lottery result. Thus, the relationship between the two can be strengthened by linking the discharge timing of the game ball with the notification of the result of the grant determination. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the impression as if all the game balls have been batch-drawn for the player, and to improve the degree of attention to the stopped game balls and the specific effect display on the display unit. Can contribute.

  When the relationship between the discharge of the game ball stopped in the stop passage 712 and the special variation display executed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is strengthened, the period required for the discharge of the game ball is long. This hinders the progress of the special variable display at a good tempo. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the stopped game ball is prevented from flowing down by its own weight and the game ball is discharged by releasing this block, the game ball can be discharged smoothly and quickly, Generation | occurrence | production of the said inconvenience can be suppressed suitably.

  As shown in the above embodiment, in a configuration in which a game ball (holding information) that is a target of special variation display is determined at a specific timing, the holding information related to the game ball depends on the timing of the game ball entering. May be carried over to be the target of the next special variation display. In addition, since there is an upper limit in the hold information stored based on the entry to the right-hand actuated entry unit 63, when the upper limit is exceeded, the game ball is excluded from the target of the special variation display. .

  Here, by providing a standby passage 711 between the right-hand actuated entry portion 63 and the stop passage 712, to prevent the game ball that has entered the entrance portion from reaching the stop passage 712 directly, Generation | occurrence | production of the said inconvenience can be suppressed suitably.

  The technical idea shown in the present embodiment is not applicable only to the second embodiment. For example, the technical idea shown in the present embodiment can be applied to the first embodiment. In this case, since the timing for determining the target of the special variation display is the start of the special variation display, the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the special variation display among the game balls waiting in the standby passage 711 at this time The same number of game balls may be transferred to the stop passage 712.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the upper limit number “4” of the hold information that can be stored in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162 for the number of hold information (game times) to be subjected to special variation display in the special game state. "It was assumed that it would be less, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the number of hold information to be subjected to special variation display to a number larger than the upper limit number “4” of hold information that can be stored in the RAM 604. Hereinafter, a specific example of this embodiment will be described.

  In the above embodiment, as the special gaming state, the first special gaming state corresponding to the prescribed number = 2, the second special gaming state corresponding to the prescribed number = 3, and the third special gaming state corresponding to the prescribed number = 4. Three are set, but in addition to this, a fourth special game state corresponding to the prescribed number = 5 is set. In the fourth special gaming state, the number of times of entering the high frequency support mode (the number of times of support) is set to “100”, thereby further diversifying the pseudo high probability zone limited to 20 + α. It will be. In this pseudo high probability zone, special variation display is executed over a maximum of five game times, and the winning probability in one display time is about 1/20.

  As shown in the second embodiment, by delaying the confirmation timing of the target hold information so as to be later than the start timing of the special variation display, the reservation information is digested and a new space is created There is a possibility that the hold information can be acquired. That is, by applying the technical idea shown in the second embodiment, the pseudo high probability zone in the fourth special gaming state shown in the present embodiment is suitably realized.

  In conjunction with this, the ball passage unit 700 (see FIG. 41) shown in the fourth embodiment is partially changed. Specifically, the passage length of the stop passage 712 is changed so that the maximum number of game balls that can be stopped is five or more. As a result, it is possible to stop the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of the hold information displayed on the display screen 75a or the like in the stop passage 712. In addition, it is good to arrange | position the 5th detection sensor 745 which can detect the 5th game ball | bath currently stopped in the stop channel | path 712 in connection with this.

  In this way, by combining the technical ideas shown in the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the limitation on the upper limit of storage as shown in this embodiment can be removed, and each special game The degree of advantage when the special variation display is executed in the state can be notified by the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712. Therefore, even if the game state is further diversified, it can be easily avoided that the game state is difficult to grasp and the effect of improving the interest is not exhibited well.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of another embodiment described below may be applied individually to the configuration in the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination with each other.

  (1) In the above embodiment, the special display effect executed by the symbol display device 75 as the “effect display means” after the transition to the special game state is executed over 1 to 3 game times. The number of game times to be subjected to special display effects is not limited to the above. For example, the special display effect can be executed for the same number of game times as the upper limit number (4) of the hold number, and more game times than the upper limit number of the hold number It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the special display effect is executed.

  (2) In the above embodiment, after the transition to the special game state, the upper limit of the number of game times to be subjected to the special display effect is not changed until the special game state is finished. It is also possible to change this and change the upper limit during the special game state. For example, when the number of executions of the special display effect reaches a preset number, or when the number of game times executed in the special game state reaches a preset number, the upper limit is changed ( For example, it can be configured to be pulled up. For example, after the number of times that the special display effect is executed over two game times or the number of game times executed in the mode reaches a preset number, the special display is made over three game times. The mode is shifted to a mode in which the production is executed. In accordance with this, by changing the staying stage (background displayed on the display screen 75a) to a higher expectation level, the winning expectation level in the pseudo high probability state can be changed. It is possible to shift (promote) to a more advantageous mode (upper mode) during the gaming state. Thereby, the player expects to shift to a more advantageous mode even after the start of the special gaming state, and can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  (3) In the above embodiment, the 4R normal jackpot result B to the 4R normal jackpot result D do not become the result of the lottery lottery performed in conjunction with the winning of the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63 (by selecting the jackpot type). Although the distribution table is set, the distribution table is changed so that the 4R normal big hit result B to the 4R normal big win result D can be obtained in the distribution lottery performed in accordance with the winning to the right-hand acted ball entering portion 63. Can also be set.

  However, the following inconvenience may occur when the jackpot result corresponding to the transition to the lower special game state is obtained during the higher special game state. In other words, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the mode shifts to a lower mode having a low degree of advantage, and this can be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, when making the above-mentioned change, if the jackpot result corresponding to the special game state is obtained again during the special game state, it is possible to avoid the transition to a mode lower than the current state. preferable.

  Specifically, the 4R normal jackpot result D is omitted from the sorting table related to the lower working ball entering portion 62, and the 4R normal jackpot result C and the 4R normal jackpot result D are added to the sorting table related to the right working ball entering portion 63. Good. According to such a configuration, even when the jackpot result for the special gaming state is further obtained during the special gaming state, the demoting to the lower mode does not occur substantially. That is, it can appear as if the current mode has been extended or promoted to a higher mode.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to perform the precursor effect suggesting the transition to the pseudo high-probability gaming state (special gaming state) during the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. It is not a thing. As shown in the present embodiment, in a gaming machine to which a so-called look-ahead function is provided, for example, when there is information corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result B to 4R normal jackpot result D in the stored hold information. Can grasp the fact before the game times related to the hold information. Therefore, when the stored information corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result B to 4R normal jackpot result D is included in the stored hold information, the game times executed prior to the game times corresponding to the jackpot It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a prelude effect that suggests transition to the special game state is performed.

  In addition, it is possible to set the period for the sign effect long by executing the sign effect in a series over the game times and the opening / closing execution mode (low frequency winning mode). Thereby, it becomes easy to devise to improve the degree of attention to the sign effect.

  (5) In the above embodiment, after shifting to the special gaming state, the variable display area ME of the display screen 75a is roughly divided into the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2, and is relatively small. Although the symbol variation display / stop display is reduced and performed in the second variation display area ME2, the second variation display area ME2 and the symbol reduction display may be omitted.

  Further, it is also possible to arrange another display unit on the display screen 75a and perform a variable display of symbols on the display unit arranged in parallel after shifting to the special game state. The display unit may be configured to switch from the non-display state to the display state when the special game state is entered, or may be configured to remain in the display state regardless of the game state.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure provided with the symbol display apparatus 75 which has a liquid crystal panel as an "effect display means", what is necessary is just to have the "display part" in which a special effect display is possible, and employ | adopt structures other than a liquid crystal display device. It is also possible. Furthermore, although the main display portion D constituting the “symbol display means” is arranged in the area partitioned by the guide rail 100, at least when the game is being played, the display screen 75a and the main display portion D can be visually recognized at the same time. For example, the main display portion D may be disposed outside the area partitioned by the guide rail 100.

  (6) In the above embodiment, during the special game state, the variable display time of each game time is restricted to be either the first variable display time T1 or the second variable display time T2. It is not always necessary to share the 1 variation display time T1 and the 2nd variation display time T2 in all the special game states (the first special game state to the third special game state). For example, the lengths of the variable display times T1 and T2 may be different depending on the special game state so that the special variable display time for executing the special effect display is the same regardless of the special game state. Good. By unifying the special variation display time, it is possible to suppress the useless diversification of the special effect display, and suitably suppress the increase in the control load of the display control device 620 due to the presence of the special game state (special display effect). be able to.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the variation display time of each game time set during the special game state is either the relatively long first variation display time T1 or the relatively short second variation display time T2. However, as long as it is set so that the game times corresponding to these two types of variable display times are included in one special effect display, the distribution of the variable display times may be arbitrarily changed. . However, when a single special effect display includes a plurality of game times corresponding to the first variation display time T1, the special effect display is extended. If there is a possibility that it will hinder speedy game progress, and the game times corresponding to the first variable display time T1 are not included in one special effect display, the number of holdings sufficient for the subsequent special effect display There is a high possibility that there will be no room to secure. Therefore, when making this change, care should be taken not to cause these various inconveniences.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the transition to the pseudo high-probability gaming state is made only in the high-frequency support mode via the low-frequency winning mode, but this is the high-frequency support mode via the high-frequency winning mode. In some cases, it may be configured to shift to a pseudo-high probability gaming state.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, the special effect display is performed only in the high frequency support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special effect display may be performed during the normal gaming state (in the low frequency support mode).

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has passed the through gate 66 with the right operation ball entry portion 63 disposed immediately below the through gate 66 on the right route where the flow path of the game ball is simplified. By always providing a guide passage 64 that reaches the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the high-frequency support mode is increased as much as possible, and further, variation in the frequency of winning occurrences is suppressed. If it is possible to increase the winning frequency in the mode as much as possible and suppress the variation in the winning frequency, the positional relationship between the through gate 66 and the right actuating ball 63 and the presence of the guide passage 64 are described. Is optional.

  (11) In the second embodiment, the holding number confirmation process is executed at a predetermined timing after the special fluctuation display is started. However, the confirmation process is executed after the special fluctuation display is started. If so, the timing may be variable.

  For example, when there is a branch point corresponding to the number of holds in the special variation display, the confirmation process may be performed after the start of the special variation display and before the branch arrival.

  (12) In the second embodiment, the confirmation process that is executed after the start of the special variation display is uniquely determined regardless of the number of the hold information stored at the start of the special variation display. It is also possible to change this and change the execution timing of the confirmation process based on the number of hold information stored and held at the start of the special variation display. Specifically, when the number of pending information is large, an uncertain branch point will be shifted backward. In such a case, it is preferable to delay the execution timing of the confirmation process.

  (13) In the combination of the second embodiment and the third embodiment, since the special variation display mode is simplified, the substantial branch point of the special variation display is set at the end of the game time. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, in such a configuration, it is also possible to set the execution timing of the confirmation process in accordance with the end of the game times that triggered the start of special variation display.

  (14) For the last game time to be subjected to special variation display, the first variation display time T1 set relatively long may be applied instead of the second variation display time T2 set relatively short. Is possible. Thereby, in the special variation display, the time occupied by the portion constituting the final variation display of the special variation display becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to secure a time during which new hold information can be acquired in the latter half of the special change display in which the hold information is digested as the special change display progresses. Therefore, securing of the hold information for the next special variation display (display time) can be promoted, which can contribute to a specific effect display loop.

  For example, the first variation display time T1 may be applied to the first game time and the last game time among a plurality of game times to be subjected to special variation display. However, excessively extending the period required for one special variation display may be a factor that the progress of the game is extended and the refreshing feeling is lowered. In view of such circumstances, it is not always necessary to share the variable display time for the first game time and the last game time. For example, the third variation display time T3 that is shorter than the first variation display time T1 and longer than the second variation display time T2 may be applied to the replaying game.

  (15) In the third embodiment, the middle reel is set as the target of reel re-variation during special variation display. However, the target of reel re-variation is not limited to the middle reel. For example, at least one of the left reel and the right reel may be configured to vary most. However, regarding the re-variation during the special variation display, it is preferable that the remaining reels be re-variable while some of the reels are stopped and displayed.

  (16) In the third embodiment, the middle symbol sequence is shifted 0.5 frame to 1 frame at a portion corresponding to the second and subsequent game times in the special variation display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the middle symbol row circulates one or more times.

  In addition, it is not always necessary to uniquely set the number of moving pieces for each game time. For example, the last game time corresponding to the special fluctuation display is displayed as a variable display with one or more laps, and the fluctuation before that is changed. Differentiation from the aspect may be achieved.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to display an image simulating a reel typified by a spinning machine such as a slot machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is not to be done. It is also possible to replace the symbol display device 75 with a reel unit on which a plurality of reels are mounted.

  (18) In each of the above-described embodiments, only one of the holding information related to the lower operating ball entering section 62 and the holding information related to the right operating ball entering section 63 is selected as one special variation display target. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special game state (high frequency support mode) starts from the state in which the hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball entering unit 63 is “0” in many cases of the first hit. Therefore, in consideration of such a case, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the special variation display is executed on the hold information relating to both the actuated balls 62 and 63. For example, as shown in the above embodiment, in the case where the holding information related to the right working ball entering portion 63 is set to be more advantageous for the player than the holding information related to the lower working ball entering portion 62, When the special variation display is started with the 1-holding information related to the lower operation entry portion 62 as a trigger, and then the hold information related to the right operation entry portion 63 is acquired, It may be configured to include the hold information.

  Further, in order to stably exhibit the pseudo high probability state, when the number of game times related to the special variation display cannot be secured by the hold information related to the right-hand actuated ball-entry unit 63, It is good to set it as the structure which considers hold information as the object of special fluctuation display.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, when the information corresponding to the result is included in the hold information to be subjected to the special fluctuation display, the hold information stored thereafter is not included in the special fluctuation display. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the restriction is not performed. For example, even when there is information corresponding to the result of the hold information subject to special fluctuation display, it is possible to make all the hold information scheduled from the beginning to be subject to special fluctuation display. is there. In addition, when the above target includes a plurality of hold information corresponding to the winning results, the same variable is also included in the special variable display after all the reserved information scheduled from the beginning is included. It is also possible to make a configuration for notifying that there is.

  (20) In each of the above embodiments, as the special gaming state, the first special gaming state corresponding to the prescribed number = 2, the second special gaming state corresponding to the prescribed number = 3, and the third corresponding to the prescribed number = 4. Although the three game states of the special game state are provided, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of special game states.

  Further, although the prescribed number in the special game state is fixed, a configuration may be adopted in which the prescribed number is determined by lottery or the like each time the special variation display is performed, that is, the prescribed number is variable.

  Furthermore, instead of performing the special variation display in a state where the specified number is determined in advance, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the specified number changes during the special variation display. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the specified number is increased while special variation display is being performed in response to newly added hold information during special variation display. In particular, when combined with the technical idea shown in the fourth embodiment, the number of game balls stopped in the stop passage 712 is increased, and as a result, a series of special fluctuation display results are actually obtained. Is more likely to be updated to the winning result. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the connection between an increase in the number of game balls that are parked and an improvement in the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, and it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the parked balls.

  (21) In the second to fifth embodiments, the confirmation timing may be delayed according to the number of pieces of hold information stored when the confirmation timing is reached. When the confirmation timing is delayed, the confirmation timing may be re-delayed on condition that there is pending information newly stored when the reset confirmation timing is reached. In this case, it is possible to set the hold information to be subjected to the special variation display, for example, exceeding the hold upper limit number. In this case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the delay is restricted when the preset maximum number is reached.

  When this technical idea is applied to the fourth embodiment or the like, the stop passage 712 may be set to a length corresponding to the maximum number in advance, or the passage itself can be expanded and contracted to display a special variation display. The passage length may be changed in accordance with an increase in the number of stationary balls corresponding to.

  (22) A storage section for storing game balls is provided at an upstream position of the right operation entrance section 63, and the game balls are stored in the right operation entrance section 63 on condition that the same number of game balls have accumulated. The following effects can be expected from the configuration in which the balls are entered together.

  If the predetermined number is equal to the specified number, the reserved information for the specified number is surely secured, and it is possible to suppress the variation in the number of the reserved information that is the target of special fluctuation display each time, Under such circumstances, the function as a pseudo high probability state can be stably exhibited.

  (23) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the stopping passage 712 as the “reservoir” is an inclined passage inclined obliquely with respect to the vertical direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the stationary passage can be a vertical passage extending in the vertical direction.

  (24) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, a decorative region and a non-decorative region are provided to the housing (specifically, the front surface portion) of the ball passage unit 700, and a portion corresponding to the stop passage 712 is provided. Although the visibility of the parked game balls is ensured by using the non-decorated area, the specific configuration is arbitrary as long as at least the number of parked game balls can be visually confirmed.

  For example, by making the front side wall portion of the stop passage opaque and making the shadow (silhouette) of the game ball rise to the front side wall portion by the light of the backlight, the number of game balls that are stopped can be visually confirmed. A configuration is also possible.

  (25) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the “stop portion” has a passage structure in which the game balls are stopped in a row, but at least the game balls are visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. As long as it can be stopped in a possible state, its specific structure is arbitrary.

  For example, it is possible to make the stop part into a dish shape or a bowl shape. However, if a plurality of game balls go to the exit part of the stop part at the same time when discharging the game balls from the stop part, inconveniences such as ball clogging may occur at the upstream position of the specific part SP as the "specific area" Increases nature. Therefore, when adopting such a modification, it is preferable that the timing is shifted so that a plurality of game balls do not reach the exit portion at the same time. Further, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of parked game balls, which may increase the burden on the player's eyes. Therefore, when adopting such a modified example, it is preferable to devise a technique to suppress the overlap in the front-rear direction of the stopped game balls so that the accumulation state of the game balls can be easily confirmed.

  (26) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, a game that is stopped at the stop before the timing at which the result of the special variation display is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. The discharge timing of the game ball from the stopping part was set so that the ball passed the specific part SP. In other words, immediately after the game ball passes through the specific part SP, the special variation display result is displayed, so that the specific part SP is related to the lottery (the specific part SP is the lottery). It was configured to show (as if it were a trigger). This gives the player the impression that the timing at which the game ball moves toward the specific part SP has an effect on the lottery result, and improves the degree of attention to the movement of the parked game ball This is a preferable configuration.

  However, the specific configuration is not limited to that described above as long as it can be seen that there is a relationship between the passage of the specific part SP and the lottery result. For example, a detection sensor that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in the specific part SP, and the notification / production control device 610 can grasp that the game ball has passed based on information from the detection sensor. And when passage of a game ball is confirmed, it can also be set as the structure which alert | reports the result while ending special variation display according to it. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that an error may occur between the main display portion D and the variation display time of the ball portion display portion DR. What is necessary is just to be the structure to do.

  (27) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the game ball is moved to the specific part SP by its own weight. However, the weight of the game ball is used as a power source for moving the game ball. It is not always necessary to use it, and a drive unit that moves the game ball to the specific part SP may be provided. However, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the weight of the game ball is reused to align the game balls in the passage so that the number of parked game balls can be easily grasped. I was devised. In the case of adopting this modification, in consideration of the above circumstances, the variation of the stopping position of the game ball is suppressed so that the position of the stopping game ball is determined (so that the counting by visual observation is not difficult), and Please devise to avoid game balls from overlapping each other and obscure numbers.

  (28) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that can be stopped in the stop passage 712 as the “stop portion” is the same as the storage upper limit number of the hold information. As described above, the passage length of the stop passage 712 is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the maximum number is set so that at least the same number of game balls as set in the special game state can be stored. For example, the passage length of the stopping passage 712 may be set so that a larger number of game balls than the upper limit number can be stopped.

  (29) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that can stand by in the standby passage 711 as the “reservoir” is the same as the storage upper limit number of the hold information. Thus, although the passage length of the standby passage 711 is set, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the maximum number is set so that at least the number of game balls equal to or greater than the upper limit number of storage can be waited.

  However, it is preferable that the game ball that has entered the right-hand actuated entry portion 63 is guided to the stop passage 712 without delay, and the guide passage 701 (especially the standby passage 711) becomes unnecessarily long. It becomes a factor. Actually, even when a ball is generated when the number of stored hold information reaches the upper limit of storage, the game ball is not stored. In view of such circumstances, it is preferable that the maximum number of game balls that can stand by in the standby path 711 as shown in the embodiment is the same as the upper limit number of memories.

  (30) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, when the game state (special game state) is reached in which the special variation display is executed over a plurality of game times (holding information), It was set as the structure which alert | reports the number of applicable pending | holding information with a game ball | bowl using the stop channel | path 712. However, it is not necessary to apply the technical idea that the number of the hold information is notified by the game ball that has entered the ball entrance part only in the special game state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the right-hand actuated landing unit 63 is applied with a configuration corresponding to a “stop unit”, and instead of or in addition to the number of holdings displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, It is also possible to make a configuration in which the number of holds is notified by the “stop section”. Here, a specific example will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  In FIG. 48, the structure of the ball passage unit 700X is simplified. Specifically, the standby passage 711 and the ball feeding mechanism 734 are omitted from the ball passage unit 700 in the fourth embodiment. Here, the movable piece 732 of the passage switching mechanism 731 located on the upstream side of the stopping passage 712 guides the game ball to the second passage 707 when the number of stored reservation information is maximum. (When the game ball is not guided to the first passage 706X), and when the number of the hold information is not the maximum, the drive control is performed so that the game ball is guided to the first passage 706X. On the other hand, the lower stopper mechanism 737 is driven and controlled so that it is discharged one by one each time a game is started. Thereby, the function as reservation number display area Db or reservation number display part RS can be given to ball passage unit 700X.

  In view of the fact that the game balls that are stopped are discharged one by one, the stopper mechanism 737 has a configuration similar to that of the ball feeding mechanism 734 shown in the fourth embodiment, so that a plurality of malfunctions or the like may occur. It is possible to reduce the possibility of inconvenience that the game balls are discharged at once.

  (31) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / production control device 610 and the display control device 620 are separated, but they may be integrated.

  (32) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The following feature A and feature B group is “a game machine such as a pachinko machine, which is set so that a privilege is given to a player when a specific condition is established based on the launch of a game ball. Specifically, whether or not to shift from a normal gaming state to a special gaming state, such as a winning gaming state, when a gaming ball enters a pitching part provided in the gaming area, etc. When the lottery is won (that is, when the specific condition is satisfied), for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, and the variable pitching device is entered. A game ball is paid out in accordance with the number of entered balls (see, for example, Patent Document 1) For this type of gaming machine, the above-described special gaming state is, for example, the above-described winning game state in the corresponding lottery lottery. High with probability set higher than normal Regarding the background art that “the game progress is suppressed from being monotonous by providing a state where the winning probability is low and a state where the winning probability is high as described above” For example, it is difficult to visually determine whether or not there is a high-probability game state internally, and suggests that the possibility of a high-probability state is low or high, etc. Various ideas have been made to achieve improvement, but there is still room for improvement in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. ” It was made with.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A game area (game area PE) and a ball entry part (for example, the right operation ball entry part 63) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the allocation information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Grant determination means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the determination target special information corresponds to the grant information MPU 602 of apparatus 162),
A symbol display means (main display portion D) in which symbols are variably displayed;
Prior to the application determination being made by the application determination means or based on the application determination being made by the application determination means, variable display of the symbol on the symbol display means is started, and the application determination means The display corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped as one game time, and the symbol is displayed for each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine comprising game time control means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for controlling the symbol display means,
A switching means (electrical accessory 71) for switching to an accepting state in which a game ball can enter the entrance part and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the accepting state;
Switching control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control means includes a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency switching mode) in which the switching mode to the acceptance state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. Support mode) is set,
Effect display means (symbol display device 75) having a display part (display screen 75a) provided separately from the symbol display means, and performing effect display on the display part;
When the switching control mode is the second switching mode, display control means for controlling the effect display means so that a specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times on the display unit ( A gaming machine comprising a notification / production control device 610 and a display control device 620).

  According to the feature A1, when the switching control mode is the second switching mode, the frequency of occurrence of entering the entering portion increases. Thereby, the player can play a game while suppressing investment as much as possible. By providing such a difference, the player plays the game while expecting to enter the second switching mode, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  In the second switching mode, the frequency of entering the ball is increased, so that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is easily secured to some extent. In general, in such a situation, a so-called time shortening function acts to digest special information one after another. In this case, for example, predetermined display combinations such as numbers are stopped and displayed one after another on the display unit, and the display mode of the display unit is also monotonous as described above due to the digestion of special information mechanically. It is easy to become.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is the second switching mode, a specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times on the display unit. The period for executing the effect display (a series of display effects) can be lengthened, and various variations can be given to the specific effect display. Therefore, even if it is a case where the time saving function mentioned above is exhibited, it can suppress that a display mode becomes monotonous.

  Further, during the second switching mode, a specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times. As a result, there is a difference between the number of actually executed game times and the number of pseudo game times (pseudo game times or display times) displayed on the display unit. That is, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is possible to display only one display time during the second switching mode (while displaying a specific effect) without changing the winning probability in one game time. The probability of winning the grant determination can be changed (increased) in a pseudo manner. For example, in a specific effect display executed over two game times, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about twice that of normal, and the specification is executed over three game times. In the effect display, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game during the second switching mode, and to contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, supplementing the relationship between the display unit of the effect display means and the symbol display means, the former may be made larger than the latter, and the former may be arranged at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine (game area) than the latter. Thereby, the various effects mentioned above can be exhibited more suitably.

  Feature A2. The display control means includes means for restricting that a specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times on the display unit during the first switching mode. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A2, a pseudo high probability state is generated based on the transition from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, and the differentiation between the first switching mode and the second switching mode can be promoted. it can.

  In the gaming machine of the type shown in the feature A1, it is one of the pleasures to follow the movement of the game ball with eyes, and the flow path of the game ball in the game area is diversified by nails or the like. For this reason, during the first switching mode, the occurrence frequency of entering the entrance portion is likely to be biased, and it becomes difficult to stably store a plurality of special information. Furthermore, when a plurality of special information is digested at a time in such a situation, it is a factor that gives the player an impression as if the special information has been lost, and the mechanism of generating the pseudo high probability state described above Becomes a factor that is grasped by the player. In this case, there is a concern that the above-described functions will not be performed well.

  On the other hand, during the second switching mode, compared to the first switching mode, the occurrence frequency of entering the entrance is higher, and it is easy to maintain a state in which a certain number of special information is stored. Therefore, in order to perform a specific effect display under such circumstances and to restrict the specific effect display during the first switching mode in which entry is difficult to occur, the function shown in the feature A1 is preferably exhibited. There is a technical significance that it is preferable in the above.

Feature A3. Display period setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining a display period from when the variable display of the symbols is started by the symbol display means until the symbols are stopped and displayed;
The display control means is an effect period setting means (notification / effect) for determining an effect period for executing the specific effect display based on each display period determined by the display period setting means for a plurality of consecutive game times. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, further comprising an MPU 612) of the control device 610.

  When executing the specific effect display shown in the feature A1, the symbol display means is set by setting the execution period (effect period) of the specific effect display based on the respective display periods related to the plurality of game times. And the relationship between the display unit and the display unit can be suitably maintained.

  As for the “production period setting means” shown in this feature, for example, “a period including each display period determined by the display period setting means for a plurality of consecutive game times, or a sum of these display periods” It is preferable that the production period for executing the specific production display is determined so as to coincide with “.

  In addition, the “display period from the start of variable display of symbols by the symbol display means to the stop display of symbols” is, for example, the period from the start to the stop of variable display of symbols during the variable display of symbols. Then, it may be any period from when the stop display (notification of the assignment determination result) ends.

  Feature A4. The specific effect display is a series of effects that starts based on the start of the first game time among a plurality of game times that are the targets of the specific effect display, and ends when the last game time ends. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, which is a display.

  The specific effect display shown in the feature A1 is started based on the start of the first game time among a plurality of consecutive game times, and is ended based on the end of the last game time. Thereby, the relationship between a symbol display means and a display part can be maintained suitably.

Feature A5. The effect display mode for performing the specific effect display by the display control means is:
A first effect display mode (for example, a first special game state) in which the specific effect display is executed over a first predetermined number of game times that are a plurality of numbers;
A second effect display mode (for example, a second special game state) in which the specific effect display is executed over a second predetermined number of game times that is greater than the first predetermined number. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

  In the configuration in which the result of the determination of grant relating to a plurality of game times is indicated by one specific effect display, the more the number of game times related to the specific effect display, the higher the possibility of being an assignment correspondence result. In other words, by increasing the number of game times that can be digested in a batch, a game state is established as if the probability of giving a corresponding result increases without changing the winning probability for each game time. . Therefore, further diversification of the game can be realized, and the effect shown in the feature A1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A6. The switching control means is configured to switch from the second switching mode to the first switching mode on condition that the number of game times executed after shifting to the second switching mode has reached a specific number. ,
In the specific number, a first specific number and a second specific number larger than the first specific number are set,
The display control means sets the first effect display mode when the specific number in the second switching mode is the first specific number, and the specific number in the second switching mode corresponds to the second specific number. The game machine according to Feature A5, further comprising an effect display mode selection means for setting the second effect display mode when the second switching mode is set.

  When shifting to the effect display mode, as the number of target game times increases, the winning probability can be increased in a pseudo manner as described above. However, as a matter of course, in such a configuration, the apparent digestion speed increases as the number of target game times increases. For this reason, when the first effect display mode / the second effect display mode are compared, it may be ambiguous which is substantially advantageous.

  In this regard, according to this feature, the number of game times executed in the second switching mode when there are a large number of game times (the number of game times to be grouped together in a pseudo manner) to be displayed for a specific effect. When the number of target game times is small, the number of game times executed in the second switching mode is also small. Thereby, the difference of the substantial advantage and disadvantage of 1st effect display mode and 2nd effect display mode can be clarified, and generation | occurrence | production of the said disadvantage can be avoided suitably.

  Feature A7. The game according to Feature A6, wherein the number obtained by integrating the first specific number and the second predetermined number is the same as the number obtained by integrating the second specific number and the first predetermined number. Machine.

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to realize a pseudo high probability winning zone in which the number of times is limited without changing the winning probability based on the determination of grant. In this way, it is possible to give a function as a stepwise high probability zone to the game in the second switching mode, which can contribute to diversification of the game.

Feature A8. When the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached the first predetermined number under the situation of the first effect display mode, the same number as the first predetermined number If the specific effect display is executed over the game times corresponding to the special information and the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not reach the first predetermined number, it is stored. The specific effect display is executed over the game times corresponding to all the special information.
When the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached the second predetermined number under the condition of the second effect display mode, the number is equal to the second predetermined number. If the specific effect display is executed over the game times corresponding to the special information and the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not reach the first predetermined number, it is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, wherein the specific effect display is executed over game times corresponding to all the special information.

  As shown in the feature A1, even in a type of gaming machine that performs a specific effect display during the second switching mode (a pseudo high probability gaming state), the variation in the number of stored special information is uneven. It is difficult to wipe it out completely. In other words, when executing a specific effect display in the effect display mode (second switching mode), special information that is appropriate for the specific effect display is not always stored. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached a predetermined number, a specific number of game times corresponding to the same number of special information as the predetermined number When the effect display is executed and the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached the predetermined number, the specific effect is applied over the game times corresponding to all the stored special information. If it is set as the structure which performs a display, it can suppress suitably that the function which implement | achieves the pseudo | simulation high probability state mentioned above is not exhibited well.

Feature A9. The effect display mode shifts to a mode execution state with the transition from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, and the mode execution is performed based on the return from the second switching mode to the first switching mode. The state is released, and the specific effect display is configured to be repeatedly executed during the second switching mode,
Information reflecting the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination It has a point identification means to identify in timing,
If the special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes the specific result by the destination specifying means corresponding to the assignment correspondence result, it is stored or stored after the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, further comprising: a restricting unit that restricts the special information to be subjected to the specific effect display.

  If a specific performance display is forcibly performed, including up to later game times, when a specific performance display results in a grant response in the process of repeating a specific performance display, the player may experience unexpected disadvantages. There is a possibility of suffering. Therefore, in the configuration having the configuration shown in the feature A5 or the like, by limiting the game times related to a specific effect display after grasping in advance the presence / absence of the assignment correspondence result by using the prior specification means and the restriction means together, The occurrence of inconvenience can be suppressed.

  The technical idea shown in this feature can be applied to the features A1 to A4.

Feature A10. The display section is provided with a first display area (such as a hold number display area Db of the display screen 75a) for displaying the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
Provided in a different location from the display section, provided with a second display area (such as the hold number display section RS of the main display section D) for displaying the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
When the display control means shifts to the first effect display mode or the second effect display mode, the second display area is in a display state, and the first display area is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, wherein:

  When diversifying the game by realizing a plurality of pseudo high probability states as shown in the feature A9, it is determined how many special information are targeted for the specific effect display. If it is grasped by a person, there is a high possibility that a mechanism of a pseudo high probability state will be understood. In this case, there is a concern that the effect shown in the feature A5 or the like cannot be exhibited well. It is assumed that the player's attention is mainly directed to a display unit on which a specific effect display is performed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs by disabling notification of the number of special information in the first display area and leaving the display of the number of special information for the second display area provided at a location different from the display unit. Can be suppressed.

Feature A11. The effect display mode shifts to a mode execution state with the transition from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, and the mode execution is performed based on the return from the second switching mode to the first switching mode. The state is released, and the specific effect display is configured to be repeatedly executed during the second switching mode,
Setting means for setting the number of times that the specific effect display can be executed based on the number of game times executed in the second switching mode and the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number;
Any one of features A5 to A10, comprising: suggesting means for suggesting the number of times of the specific effect display executed by the display unit based on the number of times set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game is in a (pseudo) high-probability gaming state with a limited number of times. Can do.

Feature A12. The effect display mode shifts to a mode execution state with the transition from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, and the mode execution is performed based on the return from the second switching mode to the first switching mode. The state is released, and the specific effect display is configured to be repeatedly executed during the second switching mode,
Display period setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining a display period from when the variable display of the symbols is started by the symbol display means until the symbols are stopped and displayed;
The display control means is an effect period setting means (notification / effect control device) for determining a period for executing the specific effect display based on each display period determined by the display period setting means for a plurality of consecutive game times. 610 MPU 612),
When the display period setting means is in the first effect display mode or the second effect display mode, the display period is set relatively long and the first display period is set relatively long. Having a selection means for selecting one of the second display periods;
The selection means selects the first display period for one special information among the first predetermined number of special information continuous in the first effect display mode and the second display period for other special information. In the second effect display mode, the first display period is selected for one special information out of the second predetermined number of special information that is continuous, and the second display period is selected for other special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A11, which is configured to be selected.

  As shown in the feature A5 and the like, when a specific effect display is performed over a plurality of game times, the time for the specific effect display varies because the time for each game time is accumulated. Such diversification of the period is not preferable because it causes an increase in the control load related to the effect display. Therefore, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be avoided by adopting a configuration in which the execution period of the specific effect display is determined by combining the long and short display periods during the effect display mode.

  In addition, two types of display periods are used, a long first display period is selected for one special information out of a predetermined number of consecutive special information, and a short second display period is selected for other special information By doing so, it is possible to suppress giving a player an impression as if a specific effect display is extended and the game progress is unduly delayed.

  And by setting it as the structure where the 1st display period set relatively long is included in one of predetermined number of special information, special information is newly memorize | stored in the middle of performing a specific production | presentation display. The possibility of being able to be increased. Therefore, it is possible to favorably avoid the function of setting the above-described pseudo high probability state from being performed well by suppressing the transition to the next specific effect display without securing a predetermined number of special information.

Feature A13. The selection means includes
The first display period is selected for the special information initially stored when the first effect display mode is entered, and after the first display period is selected, the number of stored special information is the first predetermined number. Means for selecting the second display period for the special information until reaching
The first display period is selected for the special information stored first when the second effect display mode is entered, and after the first display period is selected, the number of stored special information is the second predetermined number. And the means for selecting the second display period for the special information until reaching the above.

  In the configuration in which the first display period / second display period are selected as shown in the feature A12, it is possible to execute a specific effect display with a good tempo by using the period distribution as shown in this feature. Thus, it is possible to suitably suppress the specific effect display from becoming excessively long or excessively short.

  Note that the selection means shown in the feature A12 and the feature A13 may be configured to select the first display period / second display period regardless of a specific result (presence / absence) of the special information.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A game area (game area PE) and a ball entry part (for example, the right operation ball entry part 63) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the allocation information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Grant determination means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the determination target special information corresponds to the grant information MPU 602 of apparatus 162),
A symbol display means (main display portion D) in which symbols are variably displayed;
Prior to the application determination being made by the application determination means or based on the application determination being made by the application determination means, variable display of the symbol on the symbol display means is started, and the application determination means The display corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped as one game time, and the symbol is displayed for each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for controlling the symbol display means,
Effect display means (symbol display device 75) having a display part (display screen 75a) provided separately from the symbol display means, and performing effect display on the display part;
Display control means (notification / effect control device 610 or display control device 620) for controlling the effect display means so that a specific effect display that is continued over a plurality of game times is executed as the effect display in the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times. As a result, there is a difference between the number of actually executed game times and the number of pseudo game times (pseudo game times or display times) displayed on the display unit. In other words, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is possible to simulate the probability of winning the determination at one display time while displaying a specific effect, without changing the actual win probability in one game time. Can be changed (increased). For example, in the specific effect display executed over two game times, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about twice that of a normal game, and the specific effect executed over three game times. In the display, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game and contribute to further improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, supplementing the relationship between the display unit of the effect display means and the symbol display means, the former may be made larger than the latter, and the former may be arranged at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine (game area) than the latter. Thereby, the various effects mentioned above can be exhibited more suitably.

Feature B2. The display control means includes
Based on the fact that at least one special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the effect display start means for starting the specific effect display (MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610 and the start of the MPU 622 of the display control device 620) Function)
Confirmation means (confirmation function of MPU 612 of notification / effect control device 610) for confirming the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means during execution of the specific effect display;
Production display mode determination means (determination function of the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for determining the target game times for the specific production display based on the number of special information confirmed by the confirmation means. The gaming machine according to Feature B1,

  In gaming machines where game balls flow down the game area, the attention level is improved by diversifying the movement of the game balls, so the number of special information stored as the game progresses A constant number (for example, the upper limit number) is not always secured stably. In this type of gaming machine, if the specific effect display depends on the execution condition that “the number of special information corresponding to the specific effect display is stored”, there is an opportunity to execute the specific effect display. It becomes easy to depend on the number of special information. In this case, the opportunity for executing the specific effect display is reduced, and it becomes difficult to display the interest improvement effect by the specific effect display well.

  In addition, when the configuration is such that the target special information is determined by being bound by the number of special information stored at the start of the specific effect display, the function of generating the above-described pseudo high probability state is good. I am concerned that it will not work.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, first, the specific effect display is started, the number of stored special information is confirmed on the way, and the target of the specific effect display is determined based on the number of confirmed special information. If special information is stored during the specific effect display, the game times that are the targets of the specific effect display are determined by taking into account the special information. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature B3. The display control means includes
A setting means for setting the number of game times to be subjected to the specific effect display executed in the display section irrespective of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means;
Effect display start means for starting the specific effect display based on the fact that at least one special information is stored in the acquired information storage means;
Confirmation means for confirming the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means during execution of the specific effect display;
When the number of special information confirmed by the confirmation means has reached the set number set by the setting means, the first effect display is executed as the specific effect display over the game times corresponding to the set number. First effect display execution means;
When the number of special information confirmed by the confirmation means does not reach the set number, the second effect display is executed to execute the second effect display as the specific effect display over the number of game times smaller than the set number. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising execution means.

  In gaming machines where game balls flow down the game area, the attention level is improved by diversifying the movement of the game balls, so the number of special information stored as the game progresses A constant number (for example, the upper limit number) is not always secured stably. In this type of gaming machine, if the specific effect display depends on the execution condition that “the number of special information corresponding to the specific effect display is stored”, there is an opportunity to execute the specific effect display. It becomes easy to depend on the number of special information. In this case, the opportunity for executing the specific effect display is reduced, and it becomes difficult to display the interest improvement effect by the specific effect display well.

  In addition, when the configuration is such that the target special information is determined by being bound by the number of special information stored at the start of the specific effect display, the function of generating the above-described pseudo high probability state is good. I am concerned that it will not work.

  In this respect, even if the number of stored special information is less than the set number as shown in this feature, the specific effect display is started as long as at least the number of special information is secured for the time being In other words, it is possible to display special information during the effect display by preceding the start of the effect display regardless of whether or not the number of special information set by the setting means is stored in the acquired information storage means. There is a possibility that information will accumulate and reach the set number. Thereby, the specific effect display according to the set number can be executed, and the pseudo high probability state can be suitably generated.

  The configuration is such that the number of specific information is confirmed in the middle of the specific effect display, and the aspect of the effect display is determined as the first effect display / second effect display corresponding to the number of special information that can be confirmed. Thus, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3, further comprising a changing unit that changes a confirmation timing of the confirmation unit according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit.

  According to the feature B4, the confirmation timing by the confirmation unit is changed according to the number of stored special information (for example, when it increases). For example, it is good also as a structure delayed according to the number of special information memorize | stored at the time of the start of specific effect display, and as a structure which delays the said confirmation timing, whenever the number of special information increases in the middle of specific effect display. Also good. In any case, it is possible to increase the chances of entering the entrance part. This makes it easy to secure the same number of special information as the set number or more.

Feature B5. A switching means (electrical accessory 71) for switching to an accepting state in which a game ball can enter the entrance part and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the accepting state;
Switching control means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control means includes a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency switching mode) in which the switching mode to the acceptance state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. Support mode) is set,
The display control means controls the effect display means so as to execute the specific effect display when the switching control mode is the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B5, when the switching control mode is the second switching mode, the frequency of occurrence of entering the entrance is increased. Thereby, the player can play a game while suppressing investment as much as possible. By providing such a difference, the player plays the game while expecting to enter the second switching mode, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  In the second switching mode, the frequency of entering the ball is increased, so that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is easily secured to some extent. In general, in such a situation, a so-called time shortening function acts to digest special information one after another. In this case, for example, a predetermined pattern combination such as a number is stopped and displayed one after another on the display unit, and the special display information is monotonously digested, and the display mode of the display unit tends to be monotonous.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is the second switching mode, the specific effect display is performed over a plurality of game times on the display unit. The period for executing the display (a series of effect displays) can be lengthened, and various variations can be given to the specific effect display. Therefore, even if it is a case where the time saving function mentioned above is exhibited, it can suppress that a display mode becomes monotonous. In addition, since the special information can be easily secured, the functions shown in the feature B1 and the like can be performed well.

  Feature B6. The display control means controls the effect display means so that the specific effect display is repeatedly executed while the switching control mode is the second switching mode. The gaming machine described.

  In the configuration in which the specific effect display is repeatedly executed during the second switching mode as shown in the feature B6, the number of actually executed game times and the pseudo game times (pseudo game times displayed on the display unit) are displayed. There will be a difference in the number of game times or display times). That is, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is granted at one display time during the second switching mode (during a specific effect display) without changing the winning probability in one game time substantially. The probability of winning the determination can be changed (increased) in a pseudo manner. For example, in the specific effect display executed over two game times, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about twice that of a normal game, and the specific effect executed over three game times. In the display, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game during the second switching mode, and to contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Here, how to secure a sufficient number of special information is an important issue in exhibiting the above-described function of generating the pseudo high probability state. In this respect, if the technical idea shown in the features B2 to B4 is applied, it is possible to stably exhibit a function that generates a pseudo high probability state.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature B3, the prescribed number (the number of game times that are the target of the specific effect display on the display unit) in the second switching mode in accordance with the transition to the second switching mode. It may be configured to be set.

Feature B7. Display period setting means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining a display period from when the variable display of the symbols is started by the symbol display means until the symbols are stopped and displayed;
The display control means is an effect period setting means (notification / effect control device) for determining a period for executing the specific effect display based on each display period determined by the display period setting means for a plurality of consecutive game times. 610 MPU 612),
In the display control means, an effect display mode for repeatedly executing the specific effect display is set,
The display period setting means is a first display period that is a predetermined relatively long period and a predetermined relatively short period as the display period in the effect display mode. Having a selection means for selecting one of the second display periods;
The selection means selects the first display period for one special information among a plurality of special information to be subjected to the specific effect display at one time, and selects the second display period for other special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B6, wherein the gaming machine is configured.

  As shown in the feature B7 and the like, when the specific effect display is performed over a plurality of game times, the period of the specific effect display varies because the period for each game time is accumulated. In this way, when the periods are diversified, it is not preferable to do so in an unlimited manner because it increases the control load related to the effect display. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be avoided by adopting a configuration in which the execution period of the specific effect display is determined by combining two types of display periods in the effect display mode.

  Further, two types of display periods are employed, a long first display period is selected for one special information among a plurality of consecutive special information, and a short second display period is selected for other special information. Thus, it is possible to suppress giving the player an impression as if the specific effect display is extended and the game progress is meaninglessly delayed.

  And by setting it as the structure where the 1st display period set comparatively long is included in one of several special information, special information can be newly memorize | stored in the middle of performing specific production | presentation display Can be high. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid the function of making the above-described pseudo-high probability state not being performed well by suppressing the transition to the next specific effect display without securing a predetermined number of special information.

  Feature B8.1 The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the first display period is set for a game time corresponding to the first game time among the game times targeted for the specific effect display of one time. .

  According to the feature B8, even when the number of stored special information is less than the set number, it is possible to increase the possibility that new special information is stored during the specific effect display. Even when the special information confirmation timing is delayed from the effect display start timing as shown in the feature B2 and the feature B3, if a sufficient number of special information is not secured, the restriction on the confirmation timing becomes strong. . In this respect, if at least the one corresponding to the first game time corresponds to the first display period, the restriction can be weakened, and it is easy to earn time for securing new special information.

  Feature B9. The feature B7 or the feature, wherein the selection means is configured to select the first display period for first special information among special information newly stored after confirmation by the confirmation means. A gaming machine according to B8.

  According to the feature B9, the special information that triggers when the specific effect display is started corresponds to the first display period. Thereby, even if it is a case where a specific production | presentation display is repeated, it can make it difficult to produce the problem that a sufficient number of special information cannot be ensured by the following specific production | presentation display.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to Feature B8 or Feature B9, wherein the confirmation unit performs the confirmation during a game round corresponding to the special information that triggered the start of the specific effect display.

  As shown in the feature B2 or the like, in the configuration in which the specific effect display is started in advance, the confirmation timing by the confirmation unit may be configured to be during the first game play corresponding to the specific effect display. As shown in the feature B8 and the like, since the first display period is applied to the first game time, it is possible to appropriately earn time in securing new special information.

  Feature B11. Any of the features B8 to B10, wherein the selection means is configured to select the second display period for special information other than the special information that triggers the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature B11, when the specific effect display is started in advance, it is necessary to change the aspect of the effect display according to the number of specific information confirmed after the number is confirmed by the confirmation unit. . In this regard, the second display period is applied to the subsequent special information, thereby making it easy to adjust the end of the effect display. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in control load due to the configuration in which the specific effect display is changed in the middle according to the number of special information confirmed.

  Feature B12. The selection means is configured to select the first display period for the last special information that is the target of the specific effect display being executed when the confirmation by the confirmation means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B10.

  According to the feature B12, the final game time becomes longer among a plurality of game times digested while executing the specific effect display. Thereby, it is possible to secure a period during which new special information can be acquired in the second half of the effect display in which the special information is digested as the specific effect display progresses. Therefore, securing of special information for the next specific effect display (display times) can be promoted, and it can contribute to the loop of the specific effect display.

  Feature B13. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B12, wherein the second display period is set to be equal to or longer than a launch interval of game balls.

  According to the feature B13, the storage of the special information can be promoted even during execution of a specific effect (specifically, during execution of the game times corresponding to the second display period).

  Feature B14. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B13, wherein the setting unit includes a unit configured to perform the setting so that the set number is greater than the specified number. .

  As shown in the feature B2 or the like, by setting the special information to be the target of the specific effect display after the start of the specific effect display, the number exceeding the specified number (upper limit number) as shown in this feature is obtained. It becomes possible to make it a target of specific effect display.

Feature B15. The display unit is configured to be larger than the symbol display means in a front view of the gaming machine,
The effect display means is configured to variably display a pattern based on the special information, and to notify the result of the grant determination by its stop mode,
The specific effect display is a variable display of a pattern executed so as to be a series over a plurality of game times,
The said display control means alert | reports by the result of the said specific effect display whether the thing corresponding to a grant determination result exists in several game times used as the object of the said specific effect display. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized by:

  Even if the pseudo high probability state described above is generated by the configuration shown in the feature B1, the player's attention is directed to the symbol display means, so how the high probability state is actually created. It is likely that the high probability state will be identified as a pseudo one. In this case, when the specific effect display is performed, the player's attention is directed to the symbol display means rather than the effect display means that the user originally wants to pay attention to. Is expected to fade.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, a series of variable displays are executed over a plurality of game times on a display unit larger than the symbol display means, and some of these game times correspond to the grant determination result. If it is set as the structure which alert | reports whether it is, it can make a player's attention turn to a display part, and can suppress suitably generation | occurrence | production of the various inconveniences mentioned above.

  The technical idea shown in this feature can be applied to the above-described feature A group.

<Feature C group>
The following feature group C includes “a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, which is set so that a privilege is given to a player when a specific condition is established based on the launch of a game ball. In actuality, when a game ball enters a pitching portion provided in the game area, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game state to a special game state such as a winning game state is performed. When such a lottery is won (that is, when the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied), for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a game area is executed, and a ball enters the variable pitching device. The game balls are paid out according to the number (see, for example, Patent Document 1.) This type of gaming machine stores information related to whether or not a lottery is entered when a ball enters the ball-entry unit. And by making the number of storable information plural (so-called hold As for the background technology that “there is the ability to facilitate the progress of the game”, “in recent years, there are those that notify the number of stored information using a display screen or a light emitter. Various proposals have been made for the notification mode in order to improve the level of attention to the game, however, in order to improve the level of attention to the game using such an information storage function and notification mode. Then, there is still room for improvement. "

Feature C1. A game area (game area PE) and a ball entry part (for example, the right operation ball entry part 63) into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance part;
Acquisition information storage means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the allocation information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Grant determination means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the determination target special information corresponds to the grant information MPU 602 of apparatus 162),
A stopping portion (ball passage) configured to stop a plurality of gaming balls that have entered the entering portion so that they can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine and to discharge the stopping gaming balls. A stop passage 712 of the unit 700),
And a stop control means (MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610, etc.) for stopping the number of game balls corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the stop. To play.

  According to the feature C1, the number of game balls corresponding to the number of special information stored in the game ball that has entered the ball entering part stops at the stop part. For example, when the number of special information is four, four game balls can be stopped at the stop. By confirming the number of the game balls that are stopped, the player can grasp whether or not the game progress is advantageous. By showing information relating to such game progress using a game ball that has entered the entrance part, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between the game ball and the game progress. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game ball.

Feature C2. A symbol display means (main display portion D) in which symbols are variably displayed;
Prior to the application determination being made by the application determination means or based on the application determination being made by the application determination means, variable display of the symbol on the symbol display means is started, and the application determination means The display corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped as one game time, and the symbol is displayed for each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for controlling the symbol display means,
Effect display means (symbol display device 75) having a display part (display screen 75a) provided separately from the symbol display means, and performing effect display on the display part;
Display control means (notification / effect control device 610 or display control device 620) for controlling the effect display means so that a specific effect display that is continued over a plurality of game times is executed as the effect display in the display unit. And
The stop control means includes means for stopping the same number of game balls as the number of special information to be displayed in the specific effect display when the specific effect display is executed. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

  According to the feature C2, the specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times. As a result, there is a difference between the number of actually executed game times and the number of pseudo game times (pseudo game times or display times) displayed on the display unit. In other words, by combining a plurality of game times into one, it is possible to simulate the probability of winning the determination at one display time while displaying a specific effect, without changing the actual win probability in one game time. Can be changed (increased). For example, in the specific effect display executed over two game times, the probability (apparent probability) of winning the grant determination is about twice that of a normal game, and the specific effect executed over three game times. In the display, the probability of winning the grant determination (apparent probability) is about three times the normal. By generating such a pseudo high probability state, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the game and contribute to further improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

  Here, when the specific effect display is executed, the degree of expectation that the privilege is given through the specific effect display increases as the number of game balls stopped at the stop portion increases. In such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game ball that is parked in the parked portion.

  In addition, supplementing the relationship between the display unit of the effect display means and the symbol display means, the former may be made larger than the latter, and the former may be arranged at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine (game area) than the latter. Thereby, the various effects mentioned above can be exhibited more suitably.

  Feature C3. The stop control means is means for maintaining the game ball stopped in the stop portion until a predetermined timing before the end of the specific effect display (discharge execution / notification by the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610). The gaming machine according to Feature C2, which has a discharge regulation function.

  According to the feature C3, the degree of expectation of the specific effect display is maintained by maintaining the game ball that is stopped until a predetermined timing (for example, a timing immediately before the result is displayed by the specific effect display) before the specific effect display ends. Can be prevented from being reduced during execution of the specific effect display, and the degree of attention to the specific effect display is reduced and the original effect can no longer be exhibited well.

  Feature C4. The stop control means is a means (notification / effect control device) that allows the game ball to flow into the stop portion and prevents the game ball from flowing out from the stop portion based on the start of the specific effect display. The game machine according to Feature C2 or Feature C3, which has a discharge restriction function by MPU 610 of 610).

  According to the feature C4, every time the specific effect display is performed, the game ball that has entered the entrance part stops at the stop part. As described above, the game balls are stored by storing the game balls at the stopping portion every time the specific effect display is performed, that is, when the specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times (special information). This makes it possible to strengthen the relationship between the latter and the parked game ball among the progress of the game times and the progress of the specific effect display.

Feature C5. The stop control means discharges the game ball that is stopped at the stop portion when the predetermined timing before the specific effect display ends (discharge execution by the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) Function),
The display control means is configured such that at a timing after the game ball is discharged from the stop portion by the discharge means, the specific effect display ends on the display portion and the result of the determination of grant is notified. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein the display means is controlled.

  According to the feature C5, the game ball being stopped is discharged → the specific effect display is ended → the result of the grant determination is notified. Thus, the relationship between the two can be strengthened by linking the discharge timing of the game ball with the notification of the result of the grant determination. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the impression as if all the game balls have been batch-drawn for the player, and to improve the degree of attention to the stopped game balls and the specific effect display on the display unit. Can contribute.

Feature C6. The stop control means discharges the game ball that is stopped at the stop portion when the predetermined timing before the specific effect display ends (discharge execution by the MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610) Function)
Provided on the downstream side of the stop portion so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine, and includes a specific region (specific portion SP of the discharge passage 713) through which the game ball discharged from the stop portion passes,
The display control means notifies the result of the grant determination when the display of the specific effect is completed on the display section at a timing after the game ball discharged from the stopping section by the discharge section passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein the effect display means is controlled as described above.

  According to the feature C6, the game ball being stopped is discharged → passed through the specific area → the specific effect display is completed → the result of the grant determination is notified. In this way, by linking the timing at which the game ball is discharged and passing through the specific area with the notification of the result of the grant determination, the relationship between the motion of the game ball that has stopped and the specific effect display can be strengthened. it can. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the impression as if all the game balls have been batch-drawn for the player, and to improve the degree of attention to the stopped game balls and the specific effect display on the display unit. Can contribute.

Feature C7. The stop is
A ball passage portion (stop passage 712) provided so as to be inclined or vertical to the horizontal direction;
And a blocking means (stopper mechanism 737) for blocking outflow of the game ball by contacting the game ball existing in the ball path portion from the downstream side of the ball path portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or Feature C6, wherein the discharging means discharges the game ball that is parked in the stopping portion by switching the blocking means from a blocking state to a blocking release state. .

  As shown in the feature C5 and the feature C6, when the relationship between the discharge of the game ball stopped in the stop portion and the specific effect display executed in the display portion is strengthened, the game ball is discharged. An increase in the required period hinders the progress of the specific effect display at a good tempo. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the game ball being stopped is prevented from flowing down by its own weight, and the game ball is discharged by releasing this block, the game ball can be discharged smoothly and smoothly. This can be done quickly, and the occurrence of the above inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C8. A storage part (standby passage 711) provided between the entrance part and the stop part and capable of storing game balls;
Ball feeding means (ball feeding mechanism 734 and the like) for sending the game balls stored in the storage unit to the stopping unit;
Any one of the features C2 to C7, wherein the stop control means includes means for controlling the number of game balls reaching the stop portion by drivingly controlling the ball feeding means. The gaming machine described in one.

  In the configuration shown in the feature C2 or the like, there is a possibility that the special information related to the game ball may not be the target of the special effect display depending on the entry timing of the game ball. For example, since there is an upper limit for the special information stored on the basis of the entrance to the entrance part, if the upper limit is exceeded, the game ball will be excluded from the special effect display target.

  Here, by providing a storage part between the entrance part and the storage part, and avoiding the game ball entering the entrance part from directly reaching the stop part, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is preferably achieved. Can be suppressed.

Feature C9. The stopping part is capable of stopping a larger number of game balls than the prescribed number,
The display control means has means for controlling the effect display means such that the specific effect display is executed continuously for a number of game times larger than the prescribed number as the effect display in the display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C8, characterized in that:

  According to the feature C9, the number of special information (game times) exceeding the specified number (upper limit number) can be targeted for the specific effect display. The effects beyond the restrictions relating to the storage of the special information can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the specific effect display and the stationary ball.

Feature C10. The display control means includes
Based on the fact that at least one special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the effect display start means for starting the specific effect display (MPU 612 of the notification / effect control device 610 and the start of the MPU 622 of the display control device 620) Function)
Confirmation means (confirmation function of MPU 612 of notification / effect control device 610) for confirming the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means during execution of the specific effect display;
Production display mode determination means (determination function of the MPU 612 of the notification / production control device 610) for determining the target game times for the specific production display based on the number of special information confirmed by the confirmation means. The gaming machine according to Feature C9, wherein:

  In gaming machines where game balls flow down the game area, the attention level is improved by diversifying the movement of the game balls, so the number of special information stored as the game progresses A constant number (for example, the upper limit number) is not always secured stably. In this type of gaming machine, if the specific effect display depends on the execution condition that “the number of special information corresponding to the specific effect display is stored”, there is an opportunity to execute the specific effect display. It becomes easy to depend on the number of special information. In this case, the opportunity for executing the specific effect display is reduced, and it becomes difficult to display the interest improvement effect by the specific effect display well.

  In addition, when the configuration is such that the target special information is determined by being bound by the number of special information stored at the start of the specific effect display, the function of generating the above-described pseudo high probability state is good. I am concerned that it will not work.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, first, the specific effect display is started, the number of stored special information is confirmed on the way, and the target of the specific effect display is determined based on the number of confirmed special information. If special information is stored during the specific effect display, the game times that are the targets of the specific effect display are determined by taking into account the special information. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

  The technical idea shown in this feature can be applied to the above-described feature A group and feature B group.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball passage (guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game component (such as a nail 69) disposed in the game area (game area PE); A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a passing portion (general winning opening 61 or the like).

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 60 ... Game board, 62 ... Lower operation entrance, 62a ... Lower operation entrance, 63 ... Right operation entrance, 63a ... Right operation entrance, 65 ... Variable pitching device, 65a ... Grand prize opening, 66 ... Through gate, 71 ... Electric combination constituting switching means, 75 ... Symbol display device as effect display means, 75a ... Display screen as display unit, 81 ... Main display unit 162... Main control device 602... MPU 610. Notification / production control device constituting display control means 620... Display control device constituting display control means 700. Ball passage unit 701. , 711 ... Standby passage as a storage section, 712 ... Stop passage as a stop section, 721 ... Ball entry detection sensor, 731 ... Path switching mechanism, 734 ... Ball feed mechanism, 737 ... Stopper mechanism, 741 to 74 ... Detection sensor, 746 ... Lower limit detection sensor, D ... Main display part, Da, Db ... Reserved number display area, DL, DR ... Display part for working ball as a symbol display means, PE ... Game area, LS, RS ... number of reserved parts, SP ... specific part.

Claims (2)

A ball entrance part that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the entrance portion;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the allocation information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A symbol display means for variably displaying symbols;
Prior to the application determination being made by the application determination means or based on the application determination being made by the application determination means, variable display of the symbol on the symbol display means is started, and the application determination means The display corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped as one game time, and the symbol is displayed for each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game times control means for controlling the symbol display means;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information;
Production display means having a display part provided separately from the symbol display means, and effect display on the display part;
Display control means for controlling the effect display means so that a specific effect display that can be continued over a plurality of game times is executed as the effect display in the display unit;
A stopping part configured to stop a plurality of gaming balls that have entered the entering part so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine and to discharge the stopping gaming balls,
A stopping control means capable of stopping a number of game balls corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the stopping portion;
The stop control means, when the specific effect display is executed over a plurality of game times, prevents the outflow of game balls from the stop part, thereby the number of special information that is the target of the specific effect display. And a stopping means for stopping the same number of game balls in the stop portion, and a game ball stopped in the stop portion at a timing after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect display and before the specific effect display ends. Discharging means for discharging
The display control means controls the effect display means so that after the game ball is discharged from the stop portion by the discharge means, the specific effect display is ended and the result of the determination of grant is notified on the display portion. And
The stopping unit can stop a larger number of game balls than the upper limit number of special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage unit.
The display control means includes
Effect display start means for starting the specific effect display based on the fact that at least one special information is stored in the acquired information storage means;
Confirmation means for confirming the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means during execution of the specific effect display;
Effect display mode determining means for determining a target game time for the specific effect display based on the number of special information confirmed by the confirmation means;
Have
The gaming machine characterized by controlling the effect display means so that the specific effect display is executed over a number of game times larger than the upper limit number as the effect display in the display unit . The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is a pachinko machine.

Images